1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 0
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 0
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 0
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
149 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
203 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
211 \begin_layout Standard
212 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
213 LatexCommand tableofcontents
220 \begin_layout Chapter
224 \begin_layout Section
225 What is \SpecialChar LyX
229 \begin_layout Standard
231 is a document preparation system.
232 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
233 scripts, publishable books, business
234 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
235 It is unlike most other
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
243 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
245 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
261 pt type, left justified, 5
262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
275 \begin_layout Standard
276 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
281 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
285 \begin_layout Standard
290 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
291 's philosophy: most importantly,
292 the format of all of the manuals.
293 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
294 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
300 manual describes that, too.
303 \begin_layout Section
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
310 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
312 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
313 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
319 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
320 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
322 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
323 only a vertical scrollbar.
324 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
325 The first case is large images.
326 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
327 image and use the option
338 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
341 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
342 this doesn't work for equations yet.
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
347 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
355 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
362 \begin_layout Section
366 \begin_layout Standard
367 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
369 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
371 Just select the manual you want to read from the
378 \begin_layout Section
379 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
383 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
390 \begin_layout Standard
391 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
392 can be configured via the menu
394 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
398 \begin_inset Index idx
401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
408 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 packages are available.
412 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
414 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
416 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
421 \begin_inset space \space{}
424 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
425 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
427 To force \SpecialChar LyX
428 to re-inspect your system, you should use
430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
434 \begin_inset Index idx
437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
438 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
444 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
445 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
448 \begin_layout Section
451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
453 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
460 \begin_layout Standard
461 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
462 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
463 installed, but you will not be
464 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
465 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
466 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
467 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
468 document can always be output as plain text
472 \begin_layout Standard
473 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
474 or DocBook classes or packages.
475 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
476 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
479 \begin_layout Standard
480 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
481 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
482 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
485 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
493 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
494 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
501 \begin_inset Index idx
504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
505 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
513 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
524 \begin_layout Chapter
525 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
529 \begin_layout Section
530 Basic File Operations
531 \begin_inset Index idx
534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
543 \begin_layout Standard
548 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
549 in addition to some more advanced operations:
552 \begin_layout Itemize
574 \begin_layout Itemize
590 arg "buffer-new-template"
596 \begin_layout Itemize
618 \begin_layout Itemize
628 \begin_layout Itemize
642 \begin_layout Itemize
664 \begin_layout Itemize
676 arg "buffer-write-as"
682 \begin_layout Itemize
696 \begin_layout Itemize
710 \begin_layout Standard
711 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
712 a few minor differences.
715 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
726 command lists the available templates.
727 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
728 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
729 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
737 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
744 \begin_layout Standard
745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
777 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
778 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
779 is just that — a big, blank space.
787 \begin_layout Standard
808 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
813 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
816 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
834 will reload the document from disk.
835 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
836 and want to restore it to the last save.
845 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
846 them as your changes.
849 \begin_layout Section
850 Basic Editing Features
851 \begin_inset Index idx
854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
863 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
870 \begin_layout Standard
871 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
872 can perform cut and paste operations
873 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
874 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
875 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
876 editing features and how to access
878 We will start with cut and paste.
881 \begin_layout Standard
882 As you might expect, the
886 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
887 various other editing features.
888 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
892 \begin_layout Itemize
898 \begin_inset Index idx
901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
930 \begin_layout Itemize
936 \begin_inset Index idx
939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
968 \begin_layout Itemize
974 \begin_inset Index idx
977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1002 \begin_layout Itemize
1006 \begin_inset space ~
1012 \begin_layout Itemize
1016 \begin_inset space ~
1022 \begin_layout Itemize
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1030 \begin_inset space ~
1036 \begin_inset Index idx
1039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1048 \begin_inset Index idx
1051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1066 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1076 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1082 \begin_layout Standard
1083 The first three are self-explanatory.
1084 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1085 and other programs by
1106 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1107 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1112 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1113 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1114 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1115 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1116 into individual cells.
1120 \begin_inset space ~
1125 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1126 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1130 \begin_layout Standard
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1139 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1141 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1143 \begin_inset space ~
1150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1156 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1157 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1158 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1164 \begin_inset space \space{}
1167 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1168 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1171 \begin_inset space ~
1174 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1176 \begin_inset space ~
1180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1184 \begin_inset space ~
1193 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1194 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1196 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1200 \begin_inset space ~
1205 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1206 start a new paragraph.
1207 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1208 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1216 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1233 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 paste from the primary selection.
1237 This is normally the currently selected text.
1240 \begin_layout Standard
1243 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1267 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1273 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 button to skip the current word.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1303 \begin_inset space ~
1308 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1310 If the toggle is set, searching for
1311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1322 will not match the word
1323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1337 Match whole words only
1339 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1340 to only find complete words, e.
1341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1370 offers also an advanced
1373 \begin_inset space ~
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1382 feature that is described in section
1383 \begin_inset space ~
1387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1389 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1396 \begin_layout Standard
1397 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1398 \begin_inset space \space{}
1402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1410 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1412 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1417 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1424 \begin_layout Standard
1428 arg "inset-select-all"
1431 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1432 When the cursor is inside an inset
1435 arg "inset-select-all"
1438 selects the content of the inset.
1442 arg "inset-select-all"
1445 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1450 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1453 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1457 \begin_layout Section
1459 \begin_inset Index idx
1462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1469 \begin_inset Index idx
1472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1481 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1488 \begin_layout Standard
1489 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1491 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1497 or the toolbar button
1503 to undo some mistake.
1504 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1509 or the toolbar button
1516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1523 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1527 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1530 \begin_layout Standard
1531 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1540 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1541 This is a consequence of the 100
1542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1545 step undo limit mentioned above.
1548 \begin_layout Standard
1557 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1608 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1611 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1614 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1615 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1618 \begin_layout Itemize
1619 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1622 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1629 \begin_layout Enumerate
1630 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1634 \begin_layout Standard
1635 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1636 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1640 \begin_layout Section
1642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1644 name "sec:Navigating"
1649 \begin_inset Index idx
1652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1661 \begin_layout Standard
1663 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1671 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1672 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1675 \begin_layout Itemize
1676 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1678 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1680 \begin_inset space ~
1685 or by the toolbar button
1688 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1694 \begin_layout Itemize
1695 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1697 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1700 and use the same menu to return to them.
1701 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1704 \begin_layout Standard
1708 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1713 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1716 \begin_inset space ~
1721 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1722 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1723 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1724 your last editing position.
1727 \begin_layout Standard
1732 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1736 \begin_layout Subsection
1738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1740 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1745 \begin_inset Index idx
1748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1749 Navigating ! Outline
1755 \begin_inset Index idx
1758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1767 \begin_layout Standard
1768 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1769 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1770 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1772 \begin_inset space ~
1776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1778 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1782 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1783 \begin_inset space ~
1787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1789 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1794 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1798 \begin_layout Standard
1799 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1800 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1801 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1802 dialog and to modify the citation.
1805 \begin_layout Standard
1810 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1811 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1813 Labels and References
1815 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1824 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1827 \begin_layout Standard
1828 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1829 you further to control the display.
1834 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1835 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1841 option keeps it in the current view state.
1842 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1843 \begin_inset space ~
1846 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1847 \begin_inset space ~
1850 3, the subsections of sections
1851 \begin_inset space ~
1854 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1859 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1860 \begin_inset space ~
1864 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1874 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1877 \begin_layout Standard
1884 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1885 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1899 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1900 So, for example, you can move section
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1908 2.4 or after section
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1914 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1927 (or the corresponding key bindings
1935 ) you can change the level of sections.
1936 So you can for example make section
1937 \begin_inset space ~
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1951 \begin_layout Standard
1952 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1953 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1956 \begin_layout Subsection
1957 Horizontal Scrolling
1958 \begin_inset Index idx
1961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1970 \begin_layout Standard
1972 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1978 \begin_inset space \space{}
1982 \begin_inset space ~
1985 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1986 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1987 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1991 \begin_layout Standard
1992 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1996 \begin_layout Itemize
1998 is used on a small tablet computer
2001 \begin_layout Itemize
2002 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2014 \begin_inset space ~
2027 \begin_layout Itemize
2028 Math constructs with long command names
2031 \begin_layout Standard
2032 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2033 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2035 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2036 windows so that table
2037 \begin_inset space ~
2041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2043 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2048 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2050 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2051 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2054 \begin_layout Standard
2055 \begin_inset Float table
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2067 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2071 Horizontal scrolling test.
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2081 \begin_inset Tabular
2082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_layout Section
2129 Input/Word Completion
2130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2132 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2137 \begin_inset Index idx
2140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 \begin_layout Standard
2183 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2185 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2186 is used to propose completions.
2189 \begin_layout Standard
2190 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2193 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2198 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2209 \begin_inset space ~
2214 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2218 \begin_inset space ~
2223 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2224 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2228 \begin_inset space ~
2234 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2235 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2236 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2237 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2240 \begin_layout Standard
2242 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2243 completions available.
2248 key to accept a proposed completion.
2249 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2250 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2251 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2259 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2260 ing options for text.
2261 The special math option
2265 enables characters to be composed.
2266 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2267 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2270 , you can then input the characters
2271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2282 to a formula to get it.
2283 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2284 of the math toolbar.
2285 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2289 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2290 's installation folder.
2291 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2300 \begin_layout Section
2302 \begin_inset Index idx
2305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2312 \begin_inset Index idx
2315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2344 \begin_inset Index idx
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2378 \begin_layout Standard
2379 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2393 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2396 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2400 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2401 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2407 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2414 \begin_layout Standard
2418 \begin_inset space ~
2426 \begin_inset space ~
2447 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2451 \begin_layout Labeling
2452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2457 LatexCommand nomenclature
2459 description "Tabulator key"
2466 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2468 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2469 \begin_inset space ~
2473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2475 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2482 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2486 , especially section
2487 \begin_inset space ~
2491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2493 reference "subsec:Lists"
2499 If you are still confused, look in the
2504 \begin_inset Newline newline
2512 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2513 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2517 \begin_layout Labeling
2518 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2522 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2523 LatexCommand nomenclature
2525 description "Escape key"
2533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2540 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2541 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2544 \begin_layout Labeling
2545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2551 \begin_inset space ~
2555 \begin_inset space ~
2562 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2563 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2567 \begin_layout Standard
2568 There are three modifier keys:
2571 \begin_layout Labeling
2572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2590 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2591 LatexCommand nomenclature
2593 description "Control key"
2598 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2599 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2615 \begin_layout Itemize
2624 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2627 \begin_layout Itemize
2636 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2640 \begin_layout Labeling
2641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2659 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2660 LatexCommand nomenclature
2662 description "Shift key"
2667 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2668 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2671 \begin_layout Labeling
2672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2690 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2691 LatexCommand nomenclature
2693 description "Alt or Meta key"
2698 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2699 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2700 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2706 \begin_inset Newline newline
2709 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2711 menu accelerator keys
2714 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2715 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2719 \begin_layout Standard
2720 For example, the sequence
2721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset space ~
2731 \begin_inset space ~
2737 \begin_inset space ~
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2764 \begin_inset space ~
2770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2780 \begin_layout Standard
2785 manual lists all other things bound to the
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2794 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2796 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2797 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2798 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2799 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2800 The \SpecialChar LyX
2801 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2802 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2803 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2805 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2821 followed by a capital
2828 \begin_layout Chapter
2831 \begin_inset Index idx
2834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2844 \begin_layout Section
2846 \begin_inset Index idx
2849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2862 \begin_layout Standard
2863 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2864 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2865 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2866 numbering schemes, and so on.
2867 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2868 and format the title of your document differently.
2871 \begin_layout Standard
2876 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2877 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2878 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2879 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2880 picks one for you by default.
2881 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2884 \begin_layout Subsection
2886 \begin_inset Index idx
2889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2898 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 You can select a class using the
2908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2909 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2913 \begin_inset Index idx
2916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2923 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2931 \begin_layout Standard
2932 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2937 \begin_layout Description
2938 Article for basic articles
2941 \begin_layout Description
2942 Report for basic reports
2945 \begin_layout Description
2946 Book for writing a book
2949 \begin_layout Description
2950 Letter for US-style letters
2953 \begin_layout Standard
2954 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2955 only uses if you have installed
2956 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2958 distributions will include
2960 Here are some of the classes.
2961 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2963 Special Document Classes
2972 \begin_layout Description
2973 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2976 \begin_layout Description
2977 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2981 \begin_layout Description
2982 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2988 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2989 There are three article layouts available.
2990 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2991 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2992 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2993 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2998 sequential numbering
2999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3002 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3003 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3004 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3005 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3008 \begin_layout Description
3009 Beamer Layout for presentations
3012 \begin_layout Description
3013 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3014 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3015 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3016 with \SpecialChar LyX
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3024 \begin_layout Description
3026 \begin_inset space ~
3029 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 Foils Used to make transparencies
3040 \begin_layout Description
3041 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3042 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3043 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3044 with \SpecialChar LyX
3048 \begin_layout Description
3049 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3050 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3053 \begin_layout Description
3054 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3057 \begin_layout Description
3058 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3063 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3064 (Is used by this document.)
3067 \begin_layout Description
3068 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3075 \begin_layout Description
3080 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3081 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3083 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3087 \begin_layout Description
3088 Slides Used to make transparencies
3091 \begin_layout Description
3093 \begin_inset space ~
3096 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3097 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3100 \begin_layout Description
3101 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3104 \begin_layout Standard
3105 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3107 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3109 Special Document Classes
3116 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3117 of the document classes.
3120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3124 \begin_layout Standard
3125 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3130 \begin_inset Index idx
3133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3150 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3151 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3153 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3159 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3164 , are highly specialized.
3166 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3167 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3168 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3169 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3170 by some document class.
3171 There are just too many of them.
3172 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3175 \begin_layout Standard
3176 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3184 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3185 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3186 document class for a new file.
3188 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3191 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 manual for information on how to install them.
3199 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3205 \begin_layout Standard
3206 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3207 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3208 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3209 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3210 class files to be used for dissertation
3211 s submitted to those universities.
3212 The \SpecialChar LyX
3213 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3215 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3219 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3225 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3232 name "subsec:Modules"
3237 \begin_inset Index idx
3240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3249 \begin_layout Standard
3250 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3251 chosen document class.
3252 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3253 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3264 \begin_inset Index idx
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3274 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3278 \begin_layout Standard
3279 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3280 packages or file format converters that are not always
3281 installed by default.
3283 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3284 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3285 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3286 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3288 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3289 file without the missing prerequisites.
3290 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3291 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3298 \begin_inset Index idx
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3302 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3308 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3313 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3325 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3327 will advise you about these things.
3335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3339 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3344 \begin_inset Index idx
3347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3348 Document ! Local Layout
3356 \begin_layout Standard
3357 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3358 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3359 : They are intended to be used in
3360 a variety of different documents.
3361 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3362 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3363 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3364 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3365 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3367 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3385 manual for information on how to use it.
3388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3392 \begin_layout Standard
3393 Each class has a default set of options.
3394 Here's a quick table describing them:
3397 \begin_layout Standard
3398 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3404 \begin_layout Standard
3406 \begin_inset Tabular
3407 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3408 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3867 \begin_layout Standard
3868 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3874 \begin_layout Standard
3875 You're probably also wondering what
3876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3880 \begin_inset space ~
3884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3888 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3889 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3894 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3899 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3909 headings, there are also
3917 headings, and so on.
3918 We will describe these headings fully in section
3919 \begin_inset space ~
3923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3925 reference "subsec:Headings"
3932 \begin_layout Subsection
3934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3936 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3941 \begin_inset Index idx
3944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 \begin_inset Index idx
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3963 \begin_layout Standard
3964 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3973 \begin_inset space ~
3981 \begin_inset space ~
3986 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3988 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3989 doesn't support special options you want to
3990 use for your document.
3991 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3992 -class and its options, you have to read
3996 \begin_layout Standard
4000 \begin_inset space ~
4007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4013 \begin_inset space ~
4018 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4019 You can choose between the following five options:
4022 \begin_layout Labeling
4023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 Use default page style of current class.
4031 \begin_layout Labeling
4032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4037 No page numbers or headings.
4040 \begin_layout Labeling
4041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4049 \begin_layout Labeling
4050 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4055 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4056 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4057 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4058 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4061 \begin_layout Labeling
4062 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4067 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4068 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4074 \begin_inset Index idx
4077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4079 -packages ! fancyhdr
4085 How they are defined is explained in section
4086 \begin_inset space ~
4090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4092 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4099 \begin_layout Standard
4100 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4101 \begin_inset space ~
4105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4107 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4114 \begin_layout Subsection
4115 Paper Size and Orientation
4116 \begin_inset Index idx
4119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4120 Document ! Paper size
4126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4128 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4135 \begin_layout Standard
4136 You can find the following options in the menu
4139 \begin_inset space ~
4146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4150 \begin_inset Index idx
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4162 \begin_layout Labeling
4163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4167 \begin_inset space ~
4172 What size paper to print on.
4177 \begin_layout Itemize
4183 \begin_layout Itemize
4189 \begin_layout Itemize
4195 \begin_layout Itemize
4201 \begin_layout Itemize
4204 US letter, US legal, US executive
4207 \begin_layout Itemize
4213 \begin_layout Itemize
4220 \begin_layout Labeling
4221 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4226 To choose whether to output as
4237 \begin_layout Labeling
4238 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4242 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4248 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4251 \begin_layout Subsection
4253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4255 name "subsec:Margins"
4260 \begin_inset Index idx
4263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4270 \begin_inset Index idx
4273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4282 \begin_layout Standard
4283 Paper margins are set in the menu
4285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4289 \begin_inset Index idx
4292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4301 \begin_layout Standard
4302 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4303 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4304 the paper format and the font size into account.
4307 \begin_layout Subsection
4311 \begin_layout Standard
4312 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4318 That includes the paragraph environments.
4319 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4320 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4321 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4323 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4332 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4334 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4335 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4336 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4339 \begin_layout Section
4340 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4341 \begin_inset Index idx
4344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4345 Paragraph ! Indentation
4353 \begin_layout Subsection
4355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4357 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4364 \begin_layout Standard
4365 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4366 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4370 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4371 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4372 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4373 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4377 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4383 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4384 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4385 language than English.
4387 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4390 \begin_layout Standard
4391 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4392 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4393 into \SpecialChar LyX
4395 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4398 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4400 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4401 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4402 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4409 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4410 goes to produce a printable file.
4415 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4417 gives you the ability globally to change
4421 these pre-coded spacings.
4422 We will explain more later.
4425 \begin_layout Subsection
4426 Paragraph Separation
4427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4429 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4434 \begin_inset Index idx
4437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4438 Paragraph ! Separation
4446 \begin_layout Standard
4454 \begin_inset space ~
4462 \begin_inset space ~
4469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4473 \begin_inset Index idx
4476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4482 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4485 \begin_layout Subsection
4489 \begin_layout Standard
4490 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4495 \begin_inset space ~
4500 dialog and toggle the
4503 \begin_inset space ~
4508 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4511 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4515 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4516 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4520 \begin_layout Standard
4521 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4522 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4525 \begin_layout Subsection
4527 \begin_inset Index idx
4530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4531 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4539 \begin_layout Standard
4542 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4546 \begin_inset Index idx
4549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4562 \begin_inset space ~
4571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4572 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4578 \begin_inset Index idx
4581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4583 -packages ! setspace
4588 installed to use this feature.
4593 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4597 \begin_inset space ~
4602 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4603 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4606 \begin_layout Section
4607 Paragraph Environments
4608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4610 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4615 \begin_inset Index idx
4618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4619 Paragraph ! Environments
4625 \begin_inset Index idx
4628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4629 Paragraph environments|(
4637 \begin_layout Subsection
4641 \begin_layout Standard
4642 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4654 } \SpecialChar ldots
4664 \begin_inset Newline newline
4667 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4670 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4671 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4680 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4683 \begin_layout Standard
4684 A paragraph environment is simply a
4685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4692 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4693 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4694 scheme, labels, and so on.
4695 Additionally, you can
4696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4703 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4704 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4705 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4706 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4708 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4710 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4713 \begin_layout Standard
4714 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4715 \begin_inset Graphics
4716 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4722 at the left end of the toolbar.
4724 will change the environment of the
4728 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4729 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4730 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4734 \begin_layout Standard
4743 create a new paragraph using the
4747 paragraph environment.
4749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4756 because if you are in one of these environments:
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4765 \begin_layout Itemize
4771 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 \begin_layout Itemize
4783 \begin_layout Itemize
4789 \begin_layout Itemize
4795 \begin_layout Itemize
4801 \begin_layout Standard
4803 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4807 , rather than resetting it to
4812 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4813 \begin_inset space ~
4817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4819 reference "sec:Nesting"
4826 \begin_layout Subsection
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 The default paragraph environment is
4836 It creates a plain paragraph.
4838 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4839 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4840 this manual) are in the
4847 \begin_layout Standard
4848 You can nest a paragraph using the
4852 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4860 \begin_layout Subsection
4862 \begin_inset Index idx
4865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4874 \begin_layout Standard
4875 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4876 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4885 for thanks or contact information.
4886 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4887 places all of this on a separate page
4888 along with today's date.
4889 For other types of documents, the title
4890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4897 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4901 \begin_layout Standard
4903 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4917 Here's how you use them:
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 Put the title of your document in the
4928 \begin_layout Itemize
4929 Put the author name in the
4936 \begin_layout Itemize
4937 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4938 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4944 Note that using this environment is optional.
4945 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4946 will automatically insert today's date.
4947 If you don't want a date, use the option
4949 Suppress default date on front page
4953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4956 \begin_inset space ~
4964 \begin_layout Standard
4965 You can use footnotes to insert
4966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4973 or contact information.
4976 \begin_layout Subsection
4978 \begin_inset Index idx
4981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4990 name "subsec:Headings"
4997 \begin_layout Standard
4998 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5000 takes care of the numbering for you.
5003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 \begin_inset Index idx
5008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5009 Section headings ! Numbered
5017 \begin_layout Standard
5018 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5022 \begin_layout Enumerate
5028 \begin_layout Enumerate
5034 \begin_layout Enumerate
5040 \begin_layout Enumerate
5046 \begin_layout Enumerate
5052 \begin_layout Enumerate
5058 \begin_layout Enumerate
5064 \begin_layout Standard
5066 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5067 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5068 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5071 \begin_layout Standard
5072 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5073 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5074 You group the book into chapters.
5076 does a similar grouping:
5079 \begin_layout Itemize
5084 is divided into either
5095 \begin_layout Itemize
5107 \begin_layout Itemize
5119 \begin_layout Itemize
5131 \begin_layout Itemize
5143 \begin_layout Itemize
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5156 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5164 Not all document types use the
5168 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5173 is the top-level heading.
5181 \begin_layout Standard
5186 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5187 labels it with its number,
5188 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5190 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5204 \begin_inset Index idx
5207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5208 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5216 \begin_layout Standard
5217 The unnumbered section headings have a
5218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5225 at the end of their name.
5226 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5227 the table of contents, see section
5228 \begin_inset space ~
5232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5242 Changing the Numbering
5243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5245 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5252 \begin_layout Standard
5253 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5254 in the Table of Contents.
5255 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5257 Just as certain classes start with
5271 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5281 This is something you can change.
5284 \begin_layout Standard
5287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5291 \begin_inset Index idx
5294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 \begin_inset space ~
5307 \begin_inset space ~
5312 you will see two counters.
5317 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5318 numbers a section heading.
5319 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5324 Short Titles of Headings
5325 \begin_inset Index idx
5328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5329 Section headings ! Short titles
5335 \begin_inset Argument 1
5338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5347 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5354 \begin_layout Standard
5355 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5356 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5357 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5358 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5361 \begin_layout Standard
5363 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5364 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5365 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5366 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5371 \begin_inset space ~
5377 This will insert a box labeled
5378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5382 \begin_inset space ~
5386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5389 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5390 This also works for captions inside floats.
5391 There can only be one short title per title.
5394 \begin_layout Standard
5395 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5402 \begin_layout Standard
5403 The following information applies to all section headings:
5406 \begin_layout Itemize
5407 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5410 \begin_layout Itemize
5411 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5414 \begin_layout Itemize
5415 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5418 \begin_layout Itemize
5419 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5422 \begin_layout Subsection
5426 \begin_layout Standard
5428 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5442 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5443 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5444 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5445 the text they contain.
5446 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5454 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5457 \begin_layout Standard
5458 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5467 when you start a new paragraph.
5468 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5472 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5473 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5474 have to change back to the
5478 environment yourself.
5481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5490 \begin_inset Index idx
5493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5502 \begin_layout Standard
5503 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5504 time for the differences.
5513 are identical except for one difference:
5517 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5526 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5530 Here's an example of the
5543 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5545 See – no indentation!
5549 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5550 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5551 the other paragraph.
5554 \begin_layout Standard
5555 Here's another example, this time in the
5562 \begin_layout Quotation
5568 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5569 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5570 the first line, then
5574 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5578 you were quoting other text.
5581 \begin_layout Quotation
5582 Here's a new paragraph.
5583 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5584 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5587 \begin_layout Standard
5588 As the examples show,
5592 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5593 They should put quotes in the
5598 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5602 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5607 \begin_inset Index idx
5610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5617 \begin_inset Index idx
5620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5636 \begin_layout Standard
5641 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5647 \begin_inset Newline newline
5650 Which I did not rehearse!
5654 It could be much worse.
5655 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5657 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5658 indented a bit more than the first.
5659 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5665 \begin_inset Newline newline
5668 And make things look fine
5669 \begin_inset Newline newline
5675 arg "newline-insert newline"
5681 \begin_layout Standard
5686 does not indent both margins.
5687 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5688 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5691 arg "newline-insert newline"
5697 \begin_layout Subsection
5699 \begin_inset Index idx
5702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5718 \begin_layout Standard
5720 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5730 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5731 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5740 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5741 lets you provide your own label.
5742 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5743 describing some general features of all four of them.
5746 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5750 \begin_layout Standard
5751 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5753 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5754 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5763 reset the environment to
5767 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5768 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5769 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5773 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5777 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5784 \begin_layout Standard
5785 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5786 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5787 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5789 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5790 you read all of section
5791 \begin_inset space ~
5795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5797 reference "sec:Nesting"
5804 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5806 \begin_inset Index idx
5809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5825 \begin_layout Standard
5826 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5830 paragraph environment.
5831 It has the following properties:
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5835 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5839 \begin_layout Itemize
5841 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5845 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5849 \begin_layout Itemize
5850 The items can have any length.
5852 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5853 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5860 \begin_layout Itemize
5865 environment inside another
5869 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5873 \begin_layout Itemize
5874 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5877 \begin_layout Itemize
5879 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5882 \begin_layout Itemize
5884 \begin_inset space ~
5888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5890 reference "sec:Nesting"
5894 for a full explanation of nesting.
5898 \begin_layout Standard
5899 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5908 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5911 \begin_layout Standard
5912 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5913 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5916 \begin_layout Itemize
5917 The label for the first level
5921 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5925 \begin_layout Itemize
5926 The label for the second level is a dash.
5930 \begin_layout Itemize
5931 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5935 \begin_layout Itemize
5936 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5940 \begin_layout Itemize
5941 Back out to the third level.
5945 \begin_layout Itemize
5946 Back to the second level.
5950 \begin_layout Itemize
5951 Back to the outermost level.
5954 \begin_layout Standard
5955 These are the default labels for an
5960 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5965 dialog in the submenu
5970 \begin_inset Index idx
5973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5979 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5983 \begin_layout Standard
5984 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5985 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5987 \begin_inset space ~
5991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5993 reference "sec:Nesting"
6000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6002 \begin_inset Index idx
6005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6014 name "sec:Enumerate"
6021 \begin_layout Standard
6026 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6027 It has these properties:
6030 \begin_layout Enumerate
6031 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6035 \begin_layout Enumerate
6036 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 environment resets the counter to one.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 \begin_layout Enumerate
6067 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6068 Items can have any length.
6071 \begin_layout Enumerate
6072 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6075 \begin_layout Enumerate
6076 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6079 \begin_layout Enumerate
6080 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6084 \begin_layout Standard
6093 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6095 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6096 labels the four different levels in an
6103 \begin_layout Enumerate
6104 The first level of an
6108 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6112 \begin_layout Enumerate
6113 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6117 \begin_layout Enumerate
6118 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6122 \begin_layout Enumerate
6123 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6126 \begin_layout Enumerate
6127 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6132 \begin_layout Enumerate
6133 Back to the third level
6137 \begin_layout Enumerate
6138 Back to the second level.
6142 \begin_layout Enumerate
6143 Back to the outermost level.
6146 \begin_layout Standard
6147 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6151 environment, see section
6152 \begin_inset space ~
6156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6158 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6163 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6168 There is more to nesting
6172 environments than we've stated here.
6173 You should read section
6174 \begin_inset space ~
6178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6180 reference "sec:Nesting"
6184 to learn more about nesting.
6187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6189 \begin_inset Index idx
6192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6202 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6206 list has no fixed label.
6207 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6216 of the first line as the label.
6220 \begin_layout Description
6221 Example: This is an example of the
6228 \begin_layout Standard
6230 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6234 \begin_layout Standard
6236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6243 it is meant that the first usage of the
6247 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6249 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6257 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6265 \begin_inset space ~
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6277 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6281 for more information.) Here is an example:
6284 \begin_layout Description
6286 \begin_inset space ~
6289 Example: This one shows how to use a
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_layout Description
6305 Usage: You should use the
6309 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6310 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6312 It's not a good idea to use a
6316 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6317 You're better off using
6329 paragraphs into them.
6332 \begin_layout Description
6333 Nesting: You can nest
6337 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6341 \begin_layout Standard
6342 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6343 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6344 them from the first line.
6347 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6349 \begin_inset Index idx
6352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6361 \begin_layout Standard
6366 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6367 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6380 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6382 Here are its properties:
6385 \begin_layout Labeling
6386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6388 \begin_inset space ~
6391 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6400 of each line as the item label.
6405 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6406 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6407 space as described above.
6410 \begin_layout Labeling
6411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6412 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6413 uses different margins for the item label and the
6414 body of the item text.
6415 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6416 label width plus a little extra space.
6420 \begin_layout Labeling
6421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6423 \begin_inset space ~
6426 width \SpecialChar LyX
6427 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6428 If the label width is larger, the label
6429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6436 into the first line.
6437 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6438 margin of the rest of the item text.
6441 \begin_layout Labeling
6442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6444 \begin_inset space ~
6447 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6452 environment has the same left margin.
6453 \begin_inset Newline newline
6456 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6461 \begin_inset space ~
6466 dialog (toolbar button
6469 arg "layout-paragraph"
6476 \begin_inset space ~
6481 determines the default label width.
6482 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6491 multiple times instead.
6492 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6502 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6505 \begin_inset space ~
6510 every time you alter a label in a
6515 \begin_inset Newline newline
6518 The predefined default width is the length of
6519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6527 \begin_inset space ~
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6538 list the same way as the
6542 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6548 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6552 \begin_layout Standard
6557 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6558 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6560 \begin_inset space ~
6564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6566 reference "sec:Nesting"
6570 to learn about nesting.
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 There is yet another feature of the
6578 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6579 left-justifies the item labels by
6581 You can use additional
6585 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6586 justifies the item label.
6591 are documented in section
6592 \begin_inset space ~
6596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6598 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6603 Here are some examples:
6606 \begin_layout Labeling
6607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6608 Left The default for
6615 \begin_layout Labeling
6616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6624 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6627 \begin_layout Labeling
6628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6629 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6633 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6640 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6643 \begin_layout Subsection
6645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6647 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6652 \begin_inset Index idx
6655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6664 \begin_layout Standard
6665 The features described in this section require that the module
6667 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6669 is loaded in the document settings.
6670 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6676 \begin_inset Index idx
6679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6681 -packages ! enumitem
6689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6690 Custom Enumerate Lists
6691 \begin_inset Index idx
6694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6695 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6703 \begin_layout Standard
6705 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6711 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6712 There you add the command
6715 \begin_layout Standard
6723 \begin_layout Standard
6735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6736 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6737 Code, look at section
6738 \begin_inset space ~
6742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6744 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6757 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6764 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6765 For capital Roman numerals replace
6777 in the command above.
6778 For Arabic numerals use
6786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6793 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6808 \begin_layout Standard
6810 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6818 You can only number 26
6819 \begin_inset space ~
6822 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6830 \begin_layout Standard
6831 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6832 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6835 \begin_layout Standard
6836 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6839 \begin_layout Enumerate
6840 \begin_inset Argument 1
6843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6869 \begin_layout Enumerate
6870 \begin_inset Argument 1
6873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6896 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_layout Enumerate
6902 \begin_inset Argument 1
6905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6929 \begin_layout Enumerate
6930 \begin_inset Argument 1
6933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6959 \begin_layout Standard
6960 For this list these commands were used:
6963 \begin_layout Standard
6974 \begin_inset Newline newline
6982 \begin_inset Newline newline
6990 \begin_inset Newline newline
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7007 makes the label emphasized and
7016 \begin_layout Standard
7017 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7025 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7026 lists until you change the definition.
7034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7036 \begin_inset Index idx
7039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7040 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7048 \begin_layout Standard
7049 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7052 \begin_layout Enumerate
7053 \begin_inset Argument 1
7056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7075 \begin_inset Note Note
7078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 goes back to default numbering
7087 \begin_layout Enumerate
7091 \begin_layout Standard
7095 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7099 \begin_layout Standard
7100 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7105 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7106 to indicate that it is a resumed
7107 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7108 , but in the output.
7111 \begin_layout Standard
7112 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7120 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7129 \begin_layout Standard
7130 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7132 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7133 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7134 of a normal enumeration.
7135 There, insert the command
7138 \begin_layout Standard
7144 \begin_layout Standard
7149 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7157 \begin_layout Enumerate
7161 \begin_layout Standard
7162 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7165 \begin_layout Enumerate
7166 \begin_inset Argument 1
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7185 This enumeration starts at 4
7188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7190 \begin_inset Index idx
7193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7202 \begin_layout Standard
7203 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7205 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7208 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 \begin_layout Itemize
7213 with standard spacing
7216 \begin_layout Standard
7217 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7219 Add there the command
7223 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7226 \begin_layout Itemize
7227 \begin_inset Argument 1
7230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7249 \begin_layout Itemize
7253 \begin_layout Itemize
7257 \begin_layout Standard
7258 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7265 \begin_inset Index idx
7268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7270 -packages ! enumitem
7276 For more information see its documentation,
7277 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7287 \begin_layout Standard
7288 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7290 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7291 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7295 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7298 \begin_layout Enumerate
7299 \begin_inset Argument 1
7302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7310 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7323 \begin_layout Enumerate
7324 with negative indentation
7327 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7328 Further Customization
7329 \begin_inset Index idx
7332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7333 Lists ! Customization
7341 \begin_layout Standard
7342 You can also change the style of description lists.
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7353 changes the description label font, the command
7356 \begin_layout Standard
7362 \begin_layout Standard
7363 sets the list style.
7366 \begin_layout Standard
7367 An example where the command
7370 \begin_layout Standard
7375 itshape, style=nextline
7378 \begin_layout Standard
7382 \begin_layout Description
7384 \begin_inset space ~
7388 \begin_inset Argument 1
7391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7397 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7399 itshape, style=nextline
7409 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7410 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7414 \begin_layout Description
7416 \begin_inset space ~
7419 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7420 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7421 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7424 \begin_layout Standard
7425 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7431 \begin_inset Index idx
7434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7436 -packages ! enumitem
7442 For more information see its documentation
7443 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7453 \begin_layout Subsection
7455 \begin_inset Index idx
7458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7469 \begin_inset space ~
7472 Address: An Overview
7475 \begin_layout Standard
7476 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7477 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7485 \begin_inset space ~
7491 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7492 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7493 gags on the document.
7494 In contrast, you can use the
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7506 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7507 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7512 Of course, you're not limited to using
7519 \begin_inset space ~
7528 \begin_inset space ~
7533 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7534 some European academic papers.
7537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7541 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7548 \begin_layout Standard
7553 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7554 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7558 \begin_inset space ~
7563 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7564 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7565 Here's an example of each:
7568 \begin_layout Right Address
7570 \begin_inset Newline newline
7574 \begin_inset Newline newline
7578 \begin_inset Newline newline
7581 When is it? What is today?
7584 \begin_layout Standard
7588 \begin_inset space ~
7594 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7596 the largest block of text on a single line.
7597 Here's an example of the
7604 \begin_layout Address
7606 \begin_inset Newline newline
7609 Where do I send this
7610 \begin_inset Newline newline
7613 Your post office and country
7616 \begin_layout Standard
7617 As you can see, both
7624 \begin_inset space ~
7629 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7634 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7635 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7641 This makes sense, since
7649 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7650 Thus, you have to use
7657 arg "newline-insert newline"
7662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7665 \begin_inset space ~
7669 \begin_inset space ~
7674 ) to start a new line in an
7681 \begin_inset space ~
7689 \begin_layout Subsection
7693 \begin_layout Standard
7694 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7695 or list of references.
7697 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7702 \begin_inset Index idx
7705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7714 \begin_layout Standard
7719 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7720 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7721 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7722 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7736 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7737 The book document classes ignores the
7741 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7745 in a letter document class.
7748 \begin_layout Standard
7753 environment does several things for you.
7754 First, it puts the centered label
7755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7763 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7765 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7766 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7767 the subsequent text.
7768 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7770 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7774 \begin_layout Standard
7775 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7779 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7780 The new paragraph will still be in the
7785 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7786 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7789 \begin_layout Standard
7790 \begin_inset Float figure
7795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7797 \begin_inset Graphics
7798 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7806 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7811 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7832 \begin_layout Standard
7833 We would love to demonstrate the
7837 environment, but since this document is in the
7838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7845 class, we can't do this.
7846 We inserted it therefore as figure
7847 \begin_inset space ~
7851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7853 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7858 If you have never heard of an
7859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7866 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7869 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7871 \begin_inset Index idx
7874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7883 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7890 \begin_layout Standard
7895 environment is used to list references.
7896 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7897 only use it at the end of the document.
7909 \begin_layout Standard
7910 When you first open a
7914 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7915 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7931 depending on the document class.
7932 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7933 Each paragraph of the
7937 environment is a bibliography entry.
7942 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7943 Each new paragraph is still in the
7950 \begin_layout Standard
7951 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7952 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7954 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7956 handling, have a look at section
7957 \begin_inset space ~
7961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7963 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7970 \begin_layout Subsection
7971 Special Environments
7974 \begin_layout Standard
7976 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7977 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7985 \begin_inset Index idx
7988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7998 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8005 \begin_layout Standard
8011 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8013 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8018 key as a fixed whitespace.
8022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8035 \begin_inset space ~
8040 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8058 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8061 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8064 arg "newline-insert newline"
8081 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8082 So, when you finish using the
8087 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8088 Also, you can nest the
8093 environment inside of others.
8096 \begin_layout Standard
8097 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8100 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8107 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8112 \begin_inset space \space{}
8122 arg "newline-insert newline"
8128 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 arg "newline-insert newline"
8142 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8148 \begin_layout Itemize
8149 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8150 You must put at least one
8154 in any line you want blank.
8155 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8159 \begin_layout Itemize
8160 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8164 since that will insert
8169 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8172 arg "self-insert \""
8178 \begin_layout Standard
8182 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8186 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8199 printf("Hello World!
8204 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8208 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8212 \begin_layout Standard
8213 This is just the standard
8214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8225 \begin_layout Standard
8231 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8233 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8234 as if you used a typewriter.
8235 \begin_inset Index idx
8238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8239 Paragraph environments|)
8244 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8247 Program Code Listings
8252 \begin_inset space ~
8260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8264 \begin_inset Index idx
8267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8276 \begin_layout Standard
8281 environment is similar to the
8286 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8287 computer console text.
8292 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8306 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8307 you can have empty lines.
8320 \begin_layout Itemize
8321 have a certain language and a text style
8324 \begin_layout Itemize
8325 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8326 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8327 and \SpecialChar TeX
8331 \begin_layout Standard
8332 Because of these properties
8336 works like a typewriter.
8340 \begin_layout Verbatim
8345 \begin_layout Verbatim
8349 The following 2 lines are empty:
8352 \begin_layout Verbatim
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim
8360 \begin_layout Verbatim
8362 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8367 \begin_layout Standard
8372 environment is identical to
8376 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8377 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8384 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8389 \begin_layout Section
8390 Nesting Environments
8391 \begin_inset Index idx
8394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8395 Nesting ! Environments
8401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8410 \begin_layout Subsection
8414 \begin_layout Standard
8416 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8418 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8420 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8422 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8434 \begin_layout Enumerate
8438 \begin_layout Enumerate
8443 \begin_layout Enumerate
8447 \begin_layout Enumerate
8452 \begin_layout Enumerate
8456 \begin_layout Standard
8457 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8458 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8460 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8462 \begin_inset space ~
8466 \begin_inset space ~
8474 \begin_inset space ~
8478 \begin_inset space ~
8483 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8485 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8488 arg "depth-increment"
8494 arg "depth-decrement"
8508 arg "depth-increment"
8514 arg "depth-decrement"
8518 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8519 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8523 \begin_layout Standard
8524 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8525 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8526 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8527 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8528 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8531 \begin_layout Standard
8532 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8534 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8536 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8539 \begin_layout Subsection
8540 What You Can and Can't Nest
8543 \begin_layout Standard
8544 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8545 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8548 \begin_layout Standard
8549 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8550 than a simple yes or no.
8551 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 Completely unnestable
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8564 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8568 \begin_layout Standard
8569 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8570 environments have them:
8573 \begin_layout Description
8574 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8575 Can't nest into them.
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8597 \begin_layout Itemize
8603 \begin_layout Itemize
8610 \begin_layout Description
8612 \begin_inset space ~
8615 Nestable You can nest them.
8616 You can nest other things into them.
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8656 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Itemize
8669 \begin_layout Itemize
8675 \begin_layout Itemize
8682 \begin_layout Description
8683 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8684 You can't nest anything into them.
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Itemize
8766 \begin_layout Itemize
8770 \begin_inset space ~
8776 \begin_layout Itemize
8783 \begin_layout Standard
8784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8792 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8802 \begin_inset space ~
8805 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8806 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8807 nested section headings violate this.
8815 \begin_layout Subsection
8816 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8817 \begin_inset Index idx
8820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8821 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8829 \begin_layout Standard
8830 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8831 affected by nesting anyhow.
8835 \begin_layout Itemize
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 \begin_layout Itemize
8847 \begin_layout Standard
8849 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8857 Figures and tables in
8861 are not affected by this.
8866 Have a look at section
8867 \begin_inset space ~
8871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8873 reference "sec:Floats"
8877 for more information about
8884 \begin_layout Standard
8886 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8887 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8891 \begin_layout Standard
8892 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8900 of its own, it behaves just like a
8901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8908 paragraph environment.
8909 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8913 \begin_layout Standard
8914 Here's an example with a table:
8917 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 \begin_layout Enumerate
8923 This is (a) and it's nested.
8927 \begin_layout Standard
8928 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8934 \begin_layout Standard
8936 \begin_inset Tabular
8937 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8938 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8940 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9024 \begin_layout Standard
9025 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9032 \begin_layout Enumerate
9034 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9038 \begin_layout Enumerate
9042 \begin_layout Standard
9043 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9046 \begin_layout Enumerate
9051 \begin_layout Enumerate
9052 This is (a) and it's nested.
9056 \begin_layout Standard
9057 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9063 \begin_layout Standard
9065 \begin_inset Tabular
9066 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9067 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9069 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9153 \begin_layout Standard
9154 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9160 \begin_layout Enumerate
9167 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9170 \begin_layout Enumerate
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9175 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9179 \begin_layout Standard
9180 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9183 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9186 \begin_layout Enumerate
9191 \begin_layout Enumerate
9192 This is (a) and it's nested.
9195 \begin_layout Standard
9196 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9202 \begin_layout Standard
9204 \begin_inset Tabular
9205 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9206 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9207 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9208 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9293 \begin_layout Standard
9294 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9300 \begin_layout Enumerate
9302 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9309 \begin_layout Enumerate
9313 \begin_layout Standard
9314 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9320 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9321 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9325 \begin_layout Subsection
9326 Usage and General Features
9329 \begin_layout Standard
9330 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9331 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9340 is the innermost possible depth.
9341 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9344 \begin_layout Enumerate
9345 level #1 – outermost
9349 \begin_layout Enumerate
9354 \begin_layout Enumerate
9359 \begin_layout Enumerate
9364 \begin_layout Itemize
9369 \begin_layout Itemize
9378 \begin_layout Standard
9379 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9380 both of them in the example.
9381 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9391 For example, if we tried to nest another
9396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9403 , we would get errors.
9406 \begin_layout Subsection
9408 \begin_inset Index idx
9411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9420 \begin_layout Standard
9421 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9422 We have several examples of nested environments.
9423 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9427 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9428 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9431 \begin_layout Labeling
9432 \labelwidthstring MMM
9433 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9442 \begin_layout Labeling
9443 \labelwidthstring MMM
9444 #2-a This is level #2.
9445 We created it by using
9448 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9454 arg "depth-increment"
9461 \begin_layout Labeling
9462 \labelwidthstring MMM
9463 #3-a This is level #3.
9464 This time, we just enter
9471 arg "depth-increment"
9475 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9479 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9485 arg "depth-increment"
9492 \begin_layout Standard
9497 environment, nested inside of
9498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9506 So, it's at level #4.
9507 We did this by entering
9510 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9516 arg "depth-increment"
9519 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9524 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9540 \begin_layout Standard
9545 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9548 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9554 \begin_layout Labeling
9555 \labelwidthstring MMM
9556 #4-a This is level #4.
9560 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9563 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9568 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9572 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9577 keep nesting things inside
9578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9589 \begin_layout Labeling
9590 \labelwidthstring MMM
9591 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9596 \begin_layout Labeling
9597 \labelwidthstring MMM
9598 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9599 and this is level #6.
9600 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9604 \begin_layout Labeling
9605 \labelwidthstring MMM
9606 #5-b Back to level #5.
9610 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9616 arg "depth-decrement"
9623 \begin_layout Labeling
9624 \labelwidthstring MMM
9628 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9634 arg "depth-decrement"
9637 , we're back at level #4.
9641 \begin_layout Labeling
9642 \labelwidthstring MMM
9643 #3-b Back to level #3.
9644 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9648 \begin_layout Labeling
9649 \labelwidthstring MMM
9650 #2-b Back to level #2.
9655 \begin_layout Labeling
9656 \labelwidthstring MMM
9657 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9658 After this sentence, we will enter
9662 and change the paragraph environment back to
9669 \begin_layout Standard
9670 We could have also used the
9686 environment in place of the
9691 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9694 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9695 Example 2: Inheritance
9698 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9699 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9702 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9711 arg "depth-increment"
9715 \begin_inset Newline newline
9718 which, we will change to the
9726 \begin_layout Enumerate
9731 environment, at level #2.
9734 \begin_layout Enumerate
9735 Notice how the nested
9739 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9743 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9747 \begin_layout Standard
9748 We ended this example by entering
9753 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9757 and reset the nesting depth by using
9760 arg "depth-decrement"
9766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9767 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9776 \begin_inset Argument 1
9779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9780 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9788 \begin_layout Enumerate
9789 This is level #1, in an
9793 paragraph environment.
9794 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9798 \begin_layout Enumerate
9803 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9809 arg "depth-increment"
9813 Now, what happens if we nest an
9817 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9818 label be? An asterisk?
9822 \begin_layout Itemize
9832 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9833 So, its label is a bullet.
9834 (We got here by using
9837 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9843 arg "depth-increment"
9846 , then changing the environment to
9854 \begin_layout Itemize
9855 Here's level #4, produced using
9858 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9864 arg "depth-increment"
9868 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9873 \begin_layout Enumerate
9876 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9881 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9885 , because we are in the
9893 environment (that is, it is an
9908 \begin_layout Enumerate
9913 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9914 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9918 \begin_layout Enumerate
9919 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9922 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9925 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9928 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 arg "depth-decrement"
9935 to decrease the depth after the next
9938 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9945 \begin_layout Enumerate
9947 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9952 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9955 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9959 \begin_layout Enumerate
9960 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9969 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9974 reset the counter for the label.
9978 \begin_layout Enumerate
9982 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9988 arg "depth-decrement"
9991 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9992 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9993 into the twofold-nested
10001 \begin_layout Enumerate
10002 The same thing happens if we do another
10005 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10011 arg "depth-decrement"
10014 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10017 \begin_layout Standard
10018 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10023 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10034 The number of other
10038 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10045 The same rule applies for the
10049 environment, as well.
10052 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10053 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10056 \begin_layout Enumerate
10057 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10058 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10059 the same detail with how we did it.
10068 \begin_layout Standard
10076 arg "depth-increment"
10083 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10084 the example in parentheses someplace.
10085 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10086 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10087 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10091 \begin_layout Enumerate
10096 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10100 \begin_layout Verse
10101 Now we will add verse.
10102 \begin_inset Newline newline
10105 It will get much worse.
10106 \begin_inset Newline newline
10116 arg "depth-increment"
10126 \begin_layout Verse
10127 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10128 \begin_inset Newline newline
10131 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10132 \begin_inset Newline newline
10138 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10146 \begin_layout Verse
10147 Here comes a table:
10151 \begin_layout Standard
10152 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10158 \begin_layout Standard
10160 \begin_inset Tabular
10161 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10162 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10163 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10164 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10249 \begin_layout Verse
10253 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10263 arg "depth-increment"
10269 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10275 \begin_inset Newline newline
10283 arg "depth-decrement"
10290 \begin_layout Enumerate
10295 : level #1) This is another item.
10296 Note that selecting a
10300 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10301 3 times to put the table inside the
10309 \begin_layout Quotation
10310 We're now ending the
10314 list and changing to
10319 We're still at level #1.
10320 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10321 The next set of paragraphs is a
10322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10329 We will nest both the
10336 \begin_inset space ~
10341 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10345 for the letter body.
10349 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10352 to preserve the depth.
10353 Remember that you need to use
10356 arg "newline-insert newline"
10359 to create multiple lines inside the
10366 \begin_inset space ~
10376 \begin_layout Right Address
10378 \begin_inset Newline newline
10381 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10382 \begin_inset Newline newline
10388 \begin_layout Address
10390 \begin_inset space ~
10396 \begin_layout Quotation
10397 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10401 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10402 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10403 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10404 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10405 as soon as possible.
10406 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10409 \begin_layout Quotation
10410 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10411 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10412 with your order, along with payment.
10415 \begin_layout Quotation
10416 We thank you again for your patience.
10419 \begin_layout Address
10421 \begin_inset Newline newline
10428 \begin_layout Quotation
10429 That ends that example!
10432 \begin_layout Standard
10433 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10434 gives you a lot of power with just
10436 We could have easily nested an
10457 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10460 \begin_layout Subsection
10462 \begin_inset Index idx
10465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10466 Nesting ! Separation
10472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10474 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10481 \begin_layout Standard
10482 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10484 For example you need two different enumerations:
10487 \begin_layout Enumerate
10492 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Enumerate
10501 \begin_layout Standard
10502 \begin_inset Separator plain
10508 \begin_layout Itemize
10514 \begin_layout Standard
10515 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10521 \begin_layout Enumerate
10525 \begin_layout Enumerate
10529 \begin_layout Enumerate
10533 \begin_layout Standard
10534 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10535 list item and use the menu
10537 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10538 Start New Environment
10541 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10542 ) and behind it the new list.
10545 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10546 Start New Parent Environment
10548 only appears if the item is nested.
10549 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10553 \begin_layout Standard
10554 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10555 (red arrow in LyX).
10556 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10557 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10560 \begin_layout Standard
10561 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10564 arg "paragraph-break"
10571 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10574 \begin_layout Section
10575 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10576 \begin_inset Index idx
10579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10588 \begin_layout Standard
10589 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10590 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10592 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10593 be broken at the end of a line.
10594 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10598 \begin_layout Subsection
10600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10602 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10607 \begin_inset Index idx
10610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10619 \begin_layout Standard
10620 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10621 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10622 ) not to break the line at
10624 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10627 \begin_layout Quote
10628 Further documentation is given in section
10629 \begin_inset Newline newline
10633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10635 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10643 \begin_layout Standard
10644 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10659 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10668 A protected space is set with
10670 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10671 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10673 \begin_inset space ~
10681 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10687 \begin_layout Subsection
10689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10691 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10696 \begin_inset Index idx
10699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10700 Spacing ! Horizontal
10708 \begin_layout Standard
10709 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10712 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10716 The length units are listed in Appendix
10717 \begin_inset space ~
10721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10723 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10734 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10739 \begin_inset Index idx
10742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10743 Spaces ! Inter-word
10751 \begin_layout Standard
10752 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10753 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10754 at the ends of sentences.
10755 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10756 automatically takes care about this.
10757 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10758 followed by a period; see section
10759 \begin_inset space ~
10763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10765 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10770 To insert a normal space, select
10772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10773 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10775 \begin_inset space ~
10783 arg "space-insert normal"
10789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10793 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10798 \begin_inset Index idx
10801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10810 \begin_layout Standard
10812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10819 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10828 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10829 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10830 inside abbreviations:
10833 \begin_layout Quote
10835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10839 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10842 \begin_layout Standard
10843 or between values and units.
10844 Compare for example this:
10845 \begin_inset Newline newline
10849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10853 \begin_inset Newline newline
10856 10 kg (normal space
10859 \begin_layout Standard
10860 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10863 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10873 arg "space-insert thin"
10879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10883 \begin_layout Standard
10884 You can also insert the following space types:
10887 \begin_layout Description
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10893 \begin_inset space ~
10896 space A line with a
10897 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10901 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10905 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10908 negative thin space between the arrows.
10911 \begin_layout Description
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10917 \begin_inset space ~
10920 space A line with a
10921 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10925 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10929 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10932 negative medium space between the arrows.
10935 \begin_layout Description
10937 \begin_inset space ~
10941 \begin_inset space ~
10944 space A line with a
10945 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10949 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10953 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10956 negative thick space between the arrows.
10959 \begin_layout Description
10961 \begin_inset space ~
10965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10969 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10973 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10977 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10981 \begin_inset space ~
10985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10988 em) space between the arrows.
10991 \begin_layout Description
10993 \begin_inset space ~
10997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11001 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11005 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11009 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11013 \begin_inset space ~
11017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11020 em) space between the arrows.
11023 \begin_layout Description
11025 \begin_inset space ~
11029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11033 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11037 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11045 \begin_inset space ~
11049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11052 em) space between the arrows.
11055 \begin_layout Description
11057 \begin_inset space ~
11061 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11065 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11070 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11077 cm space between the arrows.
11080 \begin_layout Standard
11082 \begin_inset space ~
11086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11088 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11092 lists the different space sizes.
11095 \begin_layout Standard
11096 \begin_inset Float table
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11102 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11107 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11111 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11121 \begin_inset Tabular
11122 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11123 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11125 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11241 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11400 \begin_inset Index idx
11403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11412 \begin_layout Standard
11413 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11414 feature for adding extra space
11415 in a uniform fashion.
11416 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11417 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11418 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11419 equally between themselves.
11422 \begin_layout Standard
11423 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11426 \begin_layout Quote
11428 This is on the left side
11429 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11432 This is on the right
11435 \begin_layout Quote
11438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11442 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11448 \begin_layout Quote
11451 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11465 \begin_layout Standard
11466 That was an example in the
11472 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11476 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11480 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11483 is one in a standard paragraph.
11484 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11488 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11491 \begin_layout Standard
11492 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11495 \begin_inset space ~
11500 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11503 \begin_layout Standard
11505 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11515 \begin_layout Standard
11517 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11521 \begin_inset space ~
11527 \begin_layout Standard
11529 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11533 \begin_inset space ~
11539 \begin_layout Standard
11541 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11545 \begin_inset space ~
11551 \begin_layout Standard
11553 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11557 \begin_inset space ~
11563 \begin_layout Standard
11565 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11569 \begin_inset space ~
11575 \begin_layout Standard
11576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11584 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11588 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11590 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11591 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11595 option in the space dialog.
11603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11607 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11612 \begin_inset Index idx
11615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11624 \begin_layout Standard
11625 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11626 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11629 \begin_layout Standard
11630 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11633 What is correct English?:
11634 \begin_inset Newline newline
11638 \begin_inset Newline newline
11642 \begin_inset space ~
11645 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11646 \begin_inset Newline newline
11650 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11661 \begin_inset Newline newline
11665 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11676 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11682 \begin_layout Standard
11684 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11701 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11704 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11708 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11714 \begin_inset space ~
11718 \begin_inset space ~
11722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11725 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11734 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11735 That is why it is named
11736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11744 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11745 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11749 \begin_layout Subsection
11751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11753 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11758 \begin_inset Index idx
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11770 \begin_layout Standard
11771 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11774 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11776 \begin_inset space ~
11782 There you find the following sizes:
11785 \begin_layout Standard
11798 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11799 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11804 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11806 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11807 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11809 \begin_inset space ~
11815 \begin_inset Index idx
11818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11819 Document ! Settings
11824 for the paragraph separation.
11825 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11836 \begin_layout Standard
11842 \begin_inset Index idx
11845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11851 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11852 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11857 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11858 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11867 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11876 s are described in section
11877 \begin_inset space ~
11881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11883 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11892 If there are several
11896 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11897 You can therefore use
11901 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11904 \begin_layout Standard
11909 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11910 \begin_inset space ~
11914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11916 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11923 \begin_layout Standard
11924 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11934 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11935 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11947 \begin_layout Subsection
11948 Paragraph Alignment
11949 \begin_inset Index idx
11952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11953 Paragraph ! Alignment
11961 \begin_layout Standard
11962 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11964 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11967 dialog (toolbar button
11970 arg "layout-paragraph"
11974 There are five possibilities:
11977 \begin_layout Itemize
11985 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11991 \begin_layout Itemize
11999 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12005 \begin_layout Itemize
12013 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12019 \begin_layout Itemize
12027 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12033 \begin_layout Itemize
12041 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12047 \begin_layout Standard
12048 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12049 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12050 the left and right margins.
12051 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12056 This paragraph is right aligned,
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12061 this one is centered,
12064 \begin_layout Standard
12066 this one is left aligned.
12069 \begin_layout Subsection
12071 \begin_inset Index idx
12074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12075 Page breaks ! Forced
12081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12083 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12090 \begin_layout Standard
12091 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12092 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12093 force a page break where you want one.
12094 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12095 is good at page breaking.
12096 Only if you use a lot of
12100 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12101 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12104 \begin_layout Standard
12105 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12106 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12110 have to change the page breaking.
12113 \begin_layout Standard
12114 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12116 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12119 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12121 \begin_inset space ~
12127 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12130 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12132 \begin_inset space ~
12137 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12139 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12140 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12143 \begin_layout Standard
12144 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12145 at the top of a page.
12146 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12148 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12149 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12150 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12154 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12158 to learn more about
12165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12169 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12174 \begin_inset Index idx
12177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12178 Page breaks ! Clear
12186 \begin_layout Standard
12187 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12188 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12189 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12190 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12191 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12194 \begin_layout Standard
12195 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12197 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12200 \begin_inset space ~
12206 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12209 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12211 \begin_inset space ~
12215 \begin_inset space ~
12220 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12221 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12224 \begin_layout Subsection
12226 \begin_inset Index idx
12229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12238 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12245 \begin_layout Standard
12246 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12248 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12250 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12253 \begin_inset space ~
12257 \begin_inset space ~
12265 arg "newline-insert newline"
12269 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12274 \begin_inset space ~
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12286 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12289 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12291 This is useful to avoid
12292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12299 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12302 \begin_layout Standard
12303 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12304 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12306 very good at line breaking.
12307 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12308 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12309 \begin_inset space ~
12313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12315 reference "sec:Quote"
12320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12322 reference "sec:Verse"
12327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12329 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12336 \begin_layout Subsection
12338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12340 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12345 \begin_inset Index idx
12348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12357 \begin_layout Standard
12359 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12370 \begin_layout Standard
12374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12375 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12377 \begin_inset space ~
12382 you can insert horizontal lines.
12383 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12384 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12385 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12388 \begin_layout Standard
12390 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12401 \begin_layout Section
12402 Characters and Symbols
12405 \begin_layout Standard
12406 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12407 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12408 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12416 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12420 for information on how this is done.
12423 \begin_layout Standard
12424 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12429 dialog via the menu
12431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12432 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12438 \begin_layout Standard
12439 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12447 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12448 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12450 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12458 \begin_layout Section
12459 Fonts and Text Styles
12460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12462 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12469 \begin_layout Subsection
12471 \begin_inset Index idx
12474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12483 \begin_layout Standard
12484 There are two types of fonts:
12487 \begin_layout Description
12489 \begin_inset space ~
12493 \begin_inset Index idx
12496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12502 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12507 characters) in the font.
12508 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12509 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12510 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12511 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12512 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12513 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12514 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12515 \begin_inset Newline newline
12518 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12519 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12520 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12521 sizes than at small ones.
12522 \begin_inset Newline newline
12536 \begin_inset space ~
12544 \begin_layout Description
12546 \begin_inset space ~
12550 \begin_inset Index idx
12553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12559 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12560 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12561 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12562 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12563 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12564 image manipulation program.
12565 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12566 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12567 \begin_inset space ~
12570 pixels high up to 34
12571 \begin_inset space ~
12574 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12575 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12576 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12578 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12579 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12580 \begin_inset Newline newline
12583 Bitmap fonts are named
12586 \begin_inset space ~
12591 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12594 \begin_layout Standard
12595 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12596 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12597 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12598 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12599 use scalable fonts.
12602 \begin_layout Standard
12603 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12606 \begin_layout Standard
12607 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12608 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12609 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12610 font to emphasize text, you use an
12611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12619 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12621 In \SpecialChar LyX
12622 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12626 \begin_layout Subsection
12629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12631 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12638 \begin_layout Standard
12639 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 used its own fonts.
12641 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12642 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12647 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12648 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12649 to a word processor.
12650 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12651 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12652 files are very portable across
12653 different machines.
12654 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12655 has increased a lot
12656 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12659 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12661 \begin_inset space ~
12665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12667 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12672 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12673 code in the document
12674 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12677 \begin_layout Standard
12678 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12679 engines that are also able directly
12680 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12682 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12684 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12686 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12687 that is installed on your system.
12688 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12691 \begin_layout Standard
12692 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12700 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12701 es; so you might have to experiment.
12709 \begin_layout Subsection
12710 Document Font and Font size
12711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12713 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12718 \begin_inset Index idx
12721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12728 \begin_inset Index idx
12731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12740 \begin_layout Standard
12741 You can set the document fonts in the
12743 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12747 \begin_inset Index idx
12750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12751 Document ! Settings
12761 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12762 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12765 \begin_inset space ~
12774 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12776 \begin_inset space ~
12779 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12782 \begin_layout Standard
12787 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12788 This requires that you use
12800 as the output format, i.
12801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12805 \begin_inset space \space{}
12808 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12809 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12810 installed (see section
12811 \begin_inset space ~
12815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12817 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12822 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12824 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12825 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12827 \begin_inset space ~
12830 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12831 cannot determine the family.
12832 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12833 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12836 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12839 \begin_layout Standard
12840 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12841 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12846 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12852 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12853 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12861 \begin_inset space ~
12867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12880 European Computer Modern
12883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12890 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12893 \begin_layout Standard
12902 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12903 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12908 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12911 \begin_inset space ~
12916 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12922 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12923 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12926 \begin_layout Itemize
12930 \begin_inset space ~
12935 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12948 \begin_inset space ~
12953 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12954 community in order to replace
12958 as the default font.
12959 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12960 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12963 \begin_inset space ~
12976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12977 One difference is improved kerning.
12985 \begin_layout Itemize
12989 \begin_inset space ~
12993 \begin_inset space ~
12998 fonts in (the rare) case that
13001 \begin_inset space ~
13006 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13021 Virtual means that it
13022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13033 -glyphs from other fonts.
13034 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13056 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13062 \begin_inset Index idx
13065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13067 -packages ! aeguill
13072 with the document preamble line
13073 \begin_inset Newline newline
13080 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13081 \begin_inset Newline newline
13086 will fix the guillemet problem.
13091 and that accented characters are not
13095 glyph, but built of
13099 characters, the accent and the letter.
13100 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13106 If you search for example for the French word
13107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13114 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13123 and not for the glyph
13124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13128 \begin_inset space ~
13132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13138 \begin_layout Itemize
13139 If you do not like the look of
13147 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13152 \begin_inset space ~
13158 \begin_inset space ~
13168 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13169 \begin_inset space ~
13172 serif and typewriter fonts,
13176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13177 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13184 \begin_inset space ~
13193 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13198 \begin_inset space \space{}
13206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13210 \begin_inset space \space{}
13216 \begin_inset space ~
13224 \begin_inset space ~
13234 but you can also select your own.
13235 \begin_inset Newline newline
13238 The differences between roman,
13241 \begin_inset space ~
13250 fonts are explained in section
13251 \begin_inset space ~
13255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13257 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13262 \begin_inset Newline newline
13268 \begin_inset space ~
13273 was originally designed for newspapers.
13274 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13275 into the small newspaper columns.
13279 \begin_inset space ~
13284 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13287 \begin_layout Standard
13288 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13301 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13306 depends on the class you are using.
13307 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13310 \begin_layout Standard
13311 Note that the font size is the
13316 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13317 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13318 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13319 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13322 \begin_inset space ~
13328 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13329 \begin_inset space ~
13333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13335 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13342 \begin_layout Standard
13346 \begin_inset space ~
13351 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13353 \begin_inset space ~
13356 serif or typewriter.
13361 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13371 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13374 \begin_layout Standard
13379 LaTeX font encoding
13381 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13382 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13388 \begin_inset Index idx
13391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13393 -packages ! fontenc
13399 \begin_inset space ~
13403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13405 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13410 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13411 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13418 \begin_layout Standard
13419 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13421 Use Old Style Figures
13425 Use True Small Caps
13428 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13431 Use Old Style Figures
13433 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13435 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13443 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13447 Use True Small Caps
13449 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13450 of scaled capitals.
13451 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13452 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13455 \begin_layout Standard
13460 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13461 a font to display the script characters.
13465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13466 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13472 \begin_inset Index idx
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13482 So this has no effect for the document language
13496 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13500 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13508 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13513 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13514 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13516 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13518 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13521 dialog, see section
13522 \begin_inset space ~
13526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13528 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13540 \begin_layout Subsection
13544 \begin_layout Standard
13545 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13546 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13548 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13549 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13550 choose a math font in the dialog
13552 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13556 \begin_inset Index idx
13559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13560 Document ! Settings
13566 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13567 automatically selects a math font.
13568 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13569 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13578 \begin_inset space ~
13584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13589 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13590 document font is available.
13593 \begin_layout Standard
13594 Note that the math font will not be used for
13598 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13604 or by the insertion of the command
13611 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13612 \begin_inset space ~
13616 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13617 while the math characters do not.
13619 \begin_inset space ~
13622 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13625 \begin_inset space ~
13633 \begin_inset space ~
13638 in the document font settings.
13641 \begin_layout Standard
13642 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13643 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13644 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13645 font (in most cases
13646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13652 \begin_inset space ~
13658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13661 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13662 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13670 \begin_inset space ~
13676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13682 \begin_layout Subsection
13683 Using Different Character Styles
13684 \begin_inset Index idx
13687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13694 \begin_inset Index idx
13697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13706 \begin_layout Standard
13707 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13708 automatically changes the character style for certain
13709 paragraph environments.
13711 supports two character styles,
13720 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13724 \begin_layout Standard
13729 style, do one of the following:
13732 \begin_layout Itemize
13733 click on the toolbar button
13742 \begin_layout Itemize
13743 use the key binding
13752 \begin_layout Standard
13753 These commands are all toggles.
13758 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13761 \begin_layout Standard
13762 One typically uses the
13766 style for proper names.
13768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13775 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13783 \begin_layout Standard
13784 A more widely used character style is the
13789 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13796 \begin_layout Itemize
13797 clicking on the toolbar button
13806 \begin_layout Itemize
13807 using the keybindings
13816 \begin_layout Standard
13821 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13823 use a different font.
13826 \begin_layout Standard
13827 We've been using the
13831 style all over the place in this document.
13832 Here's one more example:
13835 \begin_layout Quotation
13838 Do not overuse character styles!
13841 \begin_layout Standard
13842 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13843 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13844 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13845 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13849 \begin_layout Standard
13850 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13858 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13860 \begin_inset space ~
13863 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13869 arg "dialog-show character"
13875 \begin_layout Subsection
13876 Fine-Tuning with the
13881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13883 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13888 \begin_inset Index idx
13891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13900 \begin_layout Standard
13901 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13903 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13904 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13905 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13906 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13907 from ordinary dialog.
13910 \begin_layout Standard
13911 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13912 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13913 \begin_inset Newline newline
13916 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13917 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13920 \begin_layout Standard
13921 To use custom character styles, open the
13923 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13925 \begin_inset space ~
13928 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13931 dialog or press the toolbar button
13934 arg "dialog-show character"
13938 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13939 font property that you can choose.
13940 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13943 \begin_inset space ~
13948 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13953 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13954 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13955 environments all at once.
13958 \begin_layout Standard
13959 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13962 \begin_inset space ~
13974 \begin_layout Labeling
13975 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13989 The possible options are:
13993 \begin_layout Labeling
13994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13999 This is the Roman font family.
14000 Normally a serif font.
14001 It's also the default family.
14011 \begin_layout Labeling
14012 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14016 \begin_inset space ~
14023 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14035 \begin_layout Labeling
14036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14043 This is the Typewriter font family.
14049 arg "font-typewriter"
14058 \begin_layout Labeling
14059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14064 This corresponds to the print weight.
14069 \begin_layout Labeling
14070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14075 This is the Medium font series.
14076 It's also the default series.
14079 \begin_layout Labeling
14080 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14087 This is the Bold font series.
14100 \begin_layout Labeling
14101 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14106 As the name implies.
14111 \begin_layout Labeling
14112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14117 This is the Upright font shape.
14118 It's also the default shape.
14121 \begin_layout Labeling
14122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14136 s the Italic font shape
14142 \begin_layout Labeling
14143 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14150 This is the Slanted font shape
14152 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14153 , this is different from italic).
14156 \begin_layout Labeling
14157 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14161 \begin_inset space ~
14168 This is the Small caps font shape
14175 \begin_layout Labeling
14176 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14181 Alters the text color.
14182 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14186 \begin_inset space ~
14191 , which means that the document default color set in
14193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14194 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14200 \begin_inset space ~
14205 is used, you can choose between
14282 \begin_inset Index idx
14285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14294 \begin_layout Labeling
14295 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14300 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14301 the language of the document.
14302 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14303 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14305 \begin_inset Newline newline
14308 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14310 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14311 When using the spell checking (see section
14312 \begin_inset space ~
14316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14318 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14322 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14325 \begin_layout Labeling
14326 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14331 Alters the size of the font.
14332 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14333 proportional to the document font size.
14334 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14335 the details, but a general description of what
14341 \begin_layout Labeling
14342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14363 arg "font-size tiny"
14369 \begin_layout Labeling
14370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14391 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14397 \begin_layout Labeling
14398 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14419 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14425 \begin_layout Labeling
14426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14447 arg "font-size small"
14453 \begin_layout Labeling
14454 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14468 It's also the default size.
14472 arg "font-size normal"
14478 \begin_layout Labeling
14479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14500 arg "font-size large"
14506 \begin_layout Labeling
14507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14528 arg "font-size larger"
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14556 arg "font-size largest"
14562 \begin_layout Labeling
14563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14584 arg "font-size huge"
14590 \begin_layout Labeling
14591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14612 arg "font-size giant"
14618 \begin_layout Labeling
14619 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14624 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14644 arg "font-size increase"
14650 \begin_layout Labeling
14651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14656 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14676 arg "font-size decrease"
14683 \begin_layout Standard
14688 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14689 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14691 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14692 — use those instead.
14693 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14696 \begin_layout Labeling
14697 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14702 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14707 \begin_layout Labeling
14708 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14715 This is text with emphasize on
14718 This might seem like the same as
14722 , but it is actually a bit different.
14728 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14730 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14733 \begin_layout Labeling
14734 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14741 This is text with Underbar on.
14747 arg "font-underline"
14753 \begin_inset Newline newline
14758 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14759 when you could not change fonts.
14760 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14761 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14762 because some people
14766 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14769 \begin_layout Labeling
14770 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14774 \begin_inset space ~
14781 This is text with Double underbar on.
14787 arg "font-underunderline"
14791 \begin_inset Newline newline
14794 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14795 about double underbar.
14798 \begin_layout Labeling
14799 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14803 \begin_inset space ~
14810 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14816 arg "font-underwave"
14820 \begin_inset Newline newline
14823 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14824 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14827 \begin_layout Labeling
14828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14835 This is text with Strikeout on.
14841 arg "font-strikeout"
14845 \begin_inset Newline newline
14848 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14849 changed in the meantime.
14852 \begin_layout Labeling
14853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14860 This is text with Noun on.
14867 , this is a logical attribute.
14868 Normally it's equivalent to
14871 \begin_inset space ~
14880 \begin_layout Standard
14881 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14882 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14884 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14886 \begin_inset space ~
14889 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14895 arg "dialog-show character"
14898 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14899 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14902 arg "textstyle-apply"
14906 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14910 \begin_layout Standard
14911 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14918 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14919 (suppose you just set the shape to
14920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14938 \begin_inset space ~
14950 \begin_layout Standard
14951 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14959 \begin_inset space ~
14971 \begin_layout Itemize
14977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14984 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15002 \begin_inset Newline newline
15006 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15020 \begin_inset Note Note
15023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15024 For more on phantoms see section
15025 \begin_inset space ~
15029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15031 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15041 \begin_inset Newline newline
15047 \begin_layout Itemize
15052 fonts use characters with serifs.
15053 These are the small
15054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15061 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15062 The following example shows the difference:
15063 \begin_inset Newline newline
15067 \begin_inset Newline newline
15072 text without serifs
15075 \begin_inset Newline newline
15078 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15079 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15086 \begin_layout Itemize
15091 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15092 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15093 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15096 \begin_layout Standard
15097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15104 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15105 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15108 \begin_inset space ~
15113 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15114 the property to be removed.
15115 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15116 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15117 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15135 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15136 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15144 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15148 \begin_inset space ~
15153 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15164 If you, for example, set
15165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15183 \begin_inset space ~
15188 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15197 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15200 \begin_layout Standard
15201 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15202 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15205 \begin_layout Section
15206 Printing and Previewing
15209 \begin_layout Subsection
15213 \begin_layout Standard
15214 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15215 using \SpecialChar LyX
15216 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15217 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15218 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15219 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15221 Additional Features
15226 \begin_layout Standard
15228 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15231 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15232 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15233 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15236 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15237 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15238 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15239 to turn your writing into printable output.
15240 This happens in two stages:
15243 \begin_layout Enumerate
15244 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15245 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15247 a file with the extension,
15248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15262 \begin_layout Enumerate
15263 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15264 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15265 to use the commands in the
15269 file to produce printable output.
15272 \begin_layout Subsection
15273 Output file formats
15274 \begin_inset Index idx
15277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15286 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15293 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15294 Simple text (ASCII)
15295 \begin_inset Index idx
15298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15299 File formats ! ASCII
15307 \begin_layout Standard
15308 This file type has the extension
15309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15321 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15325 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15332 \begin_layout Standard
15333 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15335 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15336 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15338 \begin_inset space ~
15344 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15345 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15346 bibliography (section
15347 \begin_inset space ~
15351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15353 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15358 If your document includes such material, use
15360 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15361 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15363 \begin_inset space ~
15367 \begin_inset space ~
15371 \begin_inset space ~
15379 \begin_inset space ~
15383 \begin_inset space ~
15389 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15390 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15396 \begin_inset Index idx
15399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15400 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 \begin_layout Standard
15410 This file type has the extension
15411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15422 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15425 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15426 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15427 -Errors or to process it manually
15428 with console commands.
15429 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15430 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15431 's temporary directory whenever you
15432 view or export your document.
15435 \begin_layout Standard
15436 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15437 -file using the menu
15439 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15440 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15444 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15445 export variants are explained in section
15446 \begin_inset space ~
15450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15452 reference "subsec:Export"
15459 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15461 \begin_inset Index idx
15464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15473 \begin_layout Standard
15474 This file type has the extension
15475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15495 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15496 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15497 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15501 \begin_layout Standard
15502 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15503 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15504 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15505 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15506 when you view the DVI.
15507 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15510 \begin_layout Standard
15511 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15513 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15514 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15519 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15520 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15522 \begin_inset space ~
15528 The latter option uses the program
15530 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15536 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15539 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15540 font access (see section
15541 \begin_inset space ~
15545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15547 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15552 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15553 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15558 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15560 \begin_inset Index idx
15563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15564 File formats ! PostScript
15572 \begin_layout Standard
15573 This file type has the extension
15574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15586 PostScript was developed by the company
15590 as a printer language.
15591 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15593 PostScript can be seen as a
15594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15597 programming language
15598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15601 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15606 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15613 \begin_inset Index idx
15616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15618 -packages ! pstricks
15628 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15631 \begin_layout Standard
15632 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15636 Encapsulated PostScript
15637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15640 (EPS, file extension
15641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15653 As \SpecialChar LyX
15654 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15655 convert them in the background to EPS.
15656 If, for example, you have 50
15657 \begin_inset space ~
15660 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15662 \begin_inset space ~
15665 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15666 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15668 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15669 EPS to avoid this problem.
15672 \begin_layout Standard
15673 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15675 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15676 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15684 \begin_inset Index idx
15687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15694 \begin_inset Index idx
15697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15706 \begin_layout Standard
15707 This file type has the extension
15708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15724 Portable Document Format
15725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15732 was derived from PostScript.
15733 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15742 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15743 looks exactly the same.
15746 \begin_layout Standard
15747 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15751 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15755 (JPG, file extension
15756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15783 Portable Network Graphics
15784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15787 (PNG, file extension
15788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15800 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15801 converts them in the
15802 background to one of these formats.
15803 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15804 will slow down your workflow.
15805 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15808 \begin_layout Standard
15809 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15811 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15817 \begin_layout Description
15819 \begin_inset space ~
15822 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15826 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15829 \begin_layout Description
15831 \begin_inset space ~
15838 ) This uses the program
15840 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15843 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15846 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15849 is a new engine, derived from
15853 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15854 access (see section
15855 \begin_inset space ~
15859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15861 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15866 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15867 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15872 \begin_layout Description
15874 \begin_inset space ~
15881 ) This uses the program
15886 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15892 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15893 font access (see section
15894 \begin_inset space ~
15898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15900 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15905 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15906 vertically written Japanese.
15909 \begin_layout Description
15911 \begin_inset space ~
15914 (cropped) This is the same as
15917 \begin_inset space ~
15922 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15923 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15924 to generate good-looking
15925 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15928 \begin_layout Description
15930 \begin_inset space ~
15933 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15937 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15941 \begin_layout Description
15943 \begin_inset space ~
15946 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15950 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15951 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15955 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15956 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15959 \begin_layout Standard
15963 \begin_inset space ~
15972 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15973 works without problems.
15974 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15975 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15979 \begin_inset space ~
15987 \begin_inset space ~
15992 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16002 \begin_inset Index idx
16005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16006 FileFormats ! XHTML
16012 \begin_inset Index idx
16015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16024 \begin_layout Standard
16025 This file type has the extension
16026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16038 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16039 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16040 When \SpecialChar LyX
16041 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16042 suitable for the purpose.
16043 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16045 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16046 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16049 between different formats, which are described in section
16051 Math Output in XHTML
16056 \begin_inset space ~
16064 \begin_layout Standard
16065 XHTML output remains
16066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16073 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16074 features are supported yet.
16078 and the World Wide Web
16082 Additional Features
16084 manual, for more information.
16087 \begin_layout Standard
16088 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16090 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16091 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16097 \begin_layout Subsection
16099 \begin_inset Index idx
16102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16111 \begin_layout Standard
16112 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16113 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16122 or use the toolbar button
16129 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16130 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16131 \begin_inset space ~
16135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16137 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16141 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16143 \begin_inset space ~
16147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16149 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16154 Further output formats can be selected via
16156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16157 View (Other Formats)
16159 or the toolbar button
16168 \begin_layout Standard
16169 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16170 viewer window using the menu
16172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16177 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16178 Update (Other Formats)
16183 \begin_layout Standard
16184 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16187 To have a real output, export your document.
16190 \begin_layout Section
16191 A few Words about Typography
16192 \begin_inset Index idx
16195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16204 \begin_layout Subsection
16205 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16206 \begin_inset Index idx
16209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16216 \begin_inset Index idx
16219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16228 \begin_layout Standard
16229 In \SpecialChar LyX
16231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16242 character comes in four lengths: the
16254 , and the minus sign:
16255 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16261 \begin_layout Standard
16262 \begin_inset Tabular
16263 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16264 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16265 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16266 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16267 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16268 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16297 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16337 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16362 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16364 \begin_inset space ~
16367 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16374 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16399 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16401 \begin_inset space ~
16404 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16425 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16459 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16465 \begin_layout Standard
16466 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16478 character multiple times in a row.
16479 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16480 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16513 \begin_layout Standard
16514 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16515 math mode and has a length of its own.
16516 Here are some examples:
16519 \begin_layout Enumerate
16520 line- and page-breaks
16521 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16531 \begin_layout Enumerate
16533 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16543 \begin_layout Enumerate
16544 Oh — there's a dash.
16545 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16555 \begin_layout Enumerate
16556 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16560 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16570 \begin_layout Subsection
16572 \begin_inset Index idx
16575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16584 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16591 \begin_layout Standard
16592 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16593 but automatically in the output.
16594 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16600 \begin_inset Index idx
16603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16610 following the rules of the document language.
16613 \begin_layout Standard
16615 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16619 font and with unusual constructs, like
16620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16628 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16629 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16630 This is done with the menu
16632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16633 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16635 \begin_inset space ~
16641 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16643 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16647 \begin_layout Standard
16648 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16649 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16660 would then see the hyphen
16661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16668 as a hyphenation possibility.
16669 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16670 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16671 as described in section
16673 Prevent Hyphenation
16678 \begin_inset space ~
16686 \begin_layout Subsection
16688 \begin_inset Index idx
16691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16701 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16704 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16711 \begin_layout Standard
16712 When \SpecialChar LyX
16713 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16714 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16716 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16722 appropriate amount of space.
16723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16726 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16728 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16729 gets after another word.
16732 \begin_layout Standard
16733 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16734 not work in all cases.
16736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16747 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16748 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16751 \begin_layout Standard
16752 Here are some examples of
16756 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16759 \begin_layout Itemize
16764 \begin_layout Itemize
16769 \begin_layout Standard
16770 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16773 \begin_layout Itemize
16775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16779 this is too much space!
16782 \begin_layout Itemize
16787 \begin_layout Standard
16788 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16791 \begin_layout Standard
16792 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16795 \begin_layout Enumerate
16799 \begin_inset space ~
16804 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16805 \begin_inset space ~
16809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16811 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16816 \begin_inset Index idx
16819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16820 Spaces ! inter-word
16828 \begin_layout Enumerate
16832 \begin_inset space ~
16837 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16838 \begin_inset space ~
16842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16844 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16849 \begin_inset Index idx
16852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16861 \begin_layout Enumerate
16865 \begin_inset space ~
16869 \begin_inset space ~
16873 \begin_inset space ~
16880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16882 \begin_inset space ~
16887 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16888 This function is also bound to
16891 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16897 \begin_layout Standard
16898 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16901 \begin_layout Itemize
16903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16907 \begin_inset space \space{}
16910 this is too much space!
16913 \begin_layout Itemize
16914 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16918 \begin_layout Standard
16919 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16920 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16922 will take care of this.
16925 \begin_layout Standard
16926 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16930 \begin_inset space ~
16936 feature described in the section
16938 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16943 Additional Features
16948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16950 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16952 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16956 \begin_inset Index idx
16959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16961 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16963 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16972 \begin_inset Index idx
16975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16977 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16979 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17012 \begin_layout Standard
17015 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
17017 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
17021 Specifically, it will
17022 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17024 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17028 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17030 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17033 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17034 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17036 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17049 The keyboard character,
17053 , generates this automatically.
17056 \begin_layout Standard
17057 You can specify what character the
17062 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17066 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17075 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17079 \begin_inset Index idx
17082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17083 Document ! Settings
17089 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17091 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17097 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17100 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17101 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17105 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17107 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756786
17113 \begin_layout Labeling
17114 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17117 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17128 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17138 \begin_inset space ~
17142 \begin_inset space ~
17146 \begin_inset Quotes els
17150 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17158 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17160 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17168 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17170 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17174 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17182 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17184 \begin_inset Quotes els
17188 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17191 quotation marks (as common, e.
17192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17200 \begin_layout Labeling
17201 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17203 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17206 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17210 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17214 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17216 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17220 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17224 \begin_inset space ~
17228 \begin_inset space ~
17232 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17236 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17244 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17245 Use quotes like ”this”
17246 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17248 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17252 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17256 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17260 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17263 quotation marks (as common, e.
17264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17272 \begin_layout Labeling
17273 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17275 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17278 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17282 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17286 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17288 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17292 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17296 \begin_inset space ~
17300 \begin_inset space ~
17304 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17308 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17316 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17318 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17322 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17326 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17328 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17332 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17336 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17340 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17343 quotation marks (as common, e.
17344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17352 \begin_layout Labeling
17353 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17355 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17358 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17362 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17366 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17368 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17372 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17376 \begin_inset space ~
17380 \begin_inset space ~
17384 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17388 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17396 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17398 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17402 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17406 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17408 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17412 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17416 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17420 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17423 quotation marks (as common, e.
17424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17432 \begin_layout Labeling
17433 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17435 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17438 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17442 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17446 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17448 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17452 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17456 \begin_inset space ~
17460 \begin_inset space ~
17464 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17468 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17476 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17478 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17482 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17486 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17488 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17492 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17496 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17500 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17503 quotation marks (as common, e.
17504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17507 g., in Switzerland)
17512 \begin_layout Labeling
17513 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17515 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17518 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17522 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17526 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17528 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17532 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17536 \begin_inset space ~
17540 \begin_inset space ~
17544 \begin_inset Quotes als
17548 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17556 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17558 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17562 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17566 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17568 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17572 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17576 \begin_inset Quotes als
17580 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17583 quotation marks (as common, e.
17584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17590 \begin_layout Labeling
17591 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17593 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17596 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17600 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17604 \begin_inset space ~
17608 \begin_inset space ~
17612 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17616 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17622 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17626 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17630 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17634 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17637 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17640 \begin_layout Labeling
17641 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17643 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17646 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17650 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17654 \begin_inset space ~
17658 \begin_inset space ~
17662 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17666 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17672 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17676 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17680 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17684 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17687 quotation marks (as common, e.
17688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17691 g., in Great Britain)
17694 \begin_layout Labeling
17695 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17697 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17700 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17704 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17708 \begin_inset space ~
17712 \begin_inset space ~
17716 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17720 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17726 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17730 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17734 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17738 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17741 quotation marks (as common, e.
17742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17748 \begin_layout Labeling
17749 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17751 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17754 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17758 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17762 \begin_inset space ~
17766 \begin_inset space ~
17770 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17774 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17780 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17784 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17788 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17792 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17795 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17801 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17802 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17803 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17804 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17805 the inner marks differ).
17815 \begin_layout Labeling
17816 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17818 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17821 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17825 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17829 \begin_inset space ~
17833 \begin_inset space ~
17837 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17841 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17847 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17851 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17855 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17859 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17862 quotation marks (as common, e.
17863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17869 \begin_layout Labeling
17870 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17872 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756796
17875 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17879 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17883 \begin_inset space ~
17887 \begin_inset space ~
17891 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17895 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17901 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17905 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17909 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17913 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17916 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17919 \begin_layout Labeling
17920 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17922 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757086
17923 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17931 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17937 \begin_inset space ~
17941 \begin_inset space ~
17947 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17955 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17959 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17963 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17967 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17971 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17974 quotation marks (as common, e.
17975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17984 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757158
17985 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17986 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17996 \begin_layout Labeling
17997 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17999 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18000 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18008 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18014 \begin_inset space ~
18018 \begin_inset space ~
18024 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18032 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18036 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18040 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18044 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18048 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18051 quotation marks (as common, e.
18052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18055 g., in North Korea and China)
18059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18061 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18062 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18063 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18073 \begin_layout Standard
18075 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
18077 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
18081 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
18083 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
18088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18090 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
18091 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18092 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18093 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18101 does not necessarily mean
18102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18110 This is why we call them
18111 \begin_inset Quotes els
18115 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18136 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
18137 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18139 \begin_inset Quotes els
18143 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18147 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
18149 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
18150 can be obtained by means of
18155 arg "quote-insert inner"
18159 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
18162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18168 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18172 \begin_layout Standard
18174 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18175 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18176 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18177 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18178 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18179 If you check the setting
18181 Use dynamic quotation marks
18185 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18186 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18189 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18190 they appear in a special color).
18191 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18192 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18197 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18200 \begin_layout Standard
18202 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18203 Individual quotation marks (i.
18204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18207 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18208 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18214 \begin_layout Subsection
18216 \begin_inset Index idx
18219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18220 Typography ! Ligatures
18226 \begin_inset Index idx
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18260 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18267 \begin_layout Standard
18268 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18269 print them as single characters.
18270 These groups are known as
18275 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18276 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18278 Here are the standard ligatures:
18281 \begin_layout Itemize
18285 \begin_layout Itemize
18289 \begin_layout Itemize
18293 \begin_layout Itemize
18297 \begin_layout Itemize
18301 \begin_layout Standard
18302 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18305 \begin_layout Standard
18306 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18307 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18315 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18331 To break a ligature, use
18333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18334 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18336 \begin_inset space ~
18343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18354 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18371 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18379 \begin_layout Subsection
18381 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18383 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18385 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18389 \begin_inset Index idx
18392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18402 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18409 \begin_layout Standard
18412 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18413 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18417 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18420 \begin_layout Description
18422 The name of the game.
18425 \begin_layout Description
18427 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18431 \begin_layout Description
18433 The \SpecialChar TeX
18434 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18438 \begin_layout Description
18439 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18440 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18444 \begin_layout Standard
18445 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18451 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18459 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18460 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18461 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18462 converges to the number
18463 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18466 : The actual version is
18467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18475 , the previous one was
18476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18487 \begin_layout Subsection
18489 \begin_inset Index idx
18492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18501 \begin_layout Standard
18502 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18503 space between two words.
18504 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18514 for units use the menu
18516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18517 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18519 \begin_inset space ~
18527 arg "space-insert thin"
18533 \begin_layout Standard
18534 Here is an example to show the differences:
18537 \begin_layout Standard
18538 \begin_inset Tabular
18539 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18540 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18541 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18542 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18549 \begin_inset space ~
18553 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18565 space between number and unit
18572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18577 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18581 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18593 half space between number and unit
18606 \begin_layout Subsection
18608 \begin_inset Index idx
18611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18612 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18620 \begin_layout Standard
18621 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18623 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18624 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18625 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18626 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18627 These bits of text became known as
18638 \begin_layout Standard
18639 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18640 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18641 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18642 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18643 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18644 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18645 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18646 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18647 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18648 \begin_inset Newline newline
18656 \begin_inset Newline newline
18664 \begin_inset Newline newline
18667 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18668 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18669 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18671 \begin_inset space ~
18675 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18677 key "latexcompanion"
18683 \begin_inset space ~
18687 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18694 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18695 's page break mechanism.
18698 \begin_layout Chapter
18699 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18702 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18709 \begin_layout Standard
18710 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18713 \begin_inset space ~
18719 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18722 \begin_layout Section
18724 \begin_inset Index idx
18727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18743 \begin_layout Standard
18745 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18748 \begin_layout Description
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18754 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18755 \begin_inset Newline newline
18759 \begin_inset Note Note
18762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18763 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18771 \begin_layout Description
18772 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18773 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18774 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18777 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18778 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18780 \begin_inset space ~
18786 \begin_inset Newline newline
18790 \begin_inset Note Comment
18793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18794 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18803 \begin_layout Description
18805 \begin_inset space ~
18808 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18809 set in the document settings under
18811 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18813 \begin_inset space ~
18819 \begin_inset Newline newline
18823 \begin_inset Newline newline
18827 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18836 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18837 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18842 of a comment that appears in the output.
18848 \begin_inset Newline newline
18852 \begin_inset Newline newline
18855 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18858 \begin_layout Standard
18859 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18867 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18871 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18874 \begin_layout Section
18876 \begin_inset Index idx
18879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18888 name "sec:Footnotes"
18895 \begin_layout Standard
18897 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18903 or the toolbar button
18906 arg "footnote-insert"
18918 \begin_inset Graphics
18919 filename clipart/footnote.png
18928 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18929 's representation of your footnote.
18939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18958 label, the box will
18962 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18963 Clicking on the box label again will close
18976 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18977 and click on the footnote
18992 \begin_layout Standard
18993 Here is an example footnote:
19001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19002 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19010 \begin_layout Standard
19011 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19012 position where the footnote box is placed.
19013 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19014 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19015 according to the document class.
19017 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19018 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19024 ey are described in the
19027 \begin_inset space ~
19035 \begin_layout Section
19037 \begin_inset Index idx
19040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19049 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19056 \begin_layout Standard
19057 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19059 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19063 \begin_inset space ~
19068 or the toolbar button
19071 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19097 appearing within your text.
19098 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19099 's representation of your margin
19108 \begin_layout Standard
19109 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19113 \begin_inset Marginal
19116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19118 This is a marginal note.
19126 \begin_layout Standard
19127 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19128 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19129 pages, right on odd pages.
19132 \begin_layout Standard
19133 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19136 \begin_inset space ~
19144 \begin_inset space ~
19152 \begin_layout Section
19153 Graphics and Images
19154 \begin_inset Index idx
19157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19164 \begin_inset Index idx
19167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19176 name "sec:Graphics"
19183 \begin_layout Standard
19184 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19185 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19188 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19197 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19200 \begin_layout Standard
19201 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19206 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19207 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19209 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19210 \begin_inset space ~
19214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19216 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19223 \begin_layout Standard
19228 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19229 of the image in the output.
19230 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19234 \begin_inset space ~
19238 \begin_inset space ~
19247 \begin_inset space ~
19251 \begin_inset space ~
19255 \begin_inset space ~
19260 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19261 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19269 \begin_layout Standard
19273 \begin_inset space ~
19277 \begin_inset space ~
19282 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19283 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19285 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19290 \begin_inset space ~
19295 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19296 with the image size is printed.
19299 \begin_layout Standard
19300 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19301 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19303 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19306 \begin_layout Standard
19308 \begin_inset Graphics
19309 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19317 \begin_layout Standard
19318 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19319 the image into a float, see section
19320 \begin_inset space ~
19324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19326 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19333 \begin_layout Subsection
19335 \begin_inset Index idx
19338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19347 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19354 \begin_layout Standard
19355 You can insert images in any known file format.
19356 But as we explained in section
19357 \begin_inset space ~
19361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19363 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19367 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19369 therefore uses the program
19373 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19374 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19375 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19376 \begin_inset space ~
19380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19382 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19389 \begin_layout Standard
19390 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19393 \begin_layout Description
19395 \begin_inset space ~
19398 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19399 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19400 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19404 Graphics Interchange Format
19405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19408 (GIF, file extension
19409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19421 \begin_inset Index idx
19424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19456 Portable Network Graphics
19457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19460 (PNG, file extension
19461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19473 \begin_inset Index idx
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19508 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19512 (JPG, file extension
19513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19537 \begin_inset Index idx
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19571 \begin_layout Description
19573 \begin_inset space ~
19576 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19578 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19579 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19580 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19581 \begin_inset Newline newline
19584 Scalable image formats can be
19585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19588 Scalable Vector Graphics
19589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19592 (SVG, file extension
19593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19605 \begin_inset Index idx
19608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19640 Encapsulated PostScript
19641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19644 (EPS, file extension
19645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19657 \begin_inset Index idx
19660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19692 Portable Document Format
19693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19696 (PDF, file extension
19697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19709 \begin_inset Index idx
19712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19727 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19728 result will not be scalable.
19729 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19735 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19743 \begin_layout Standard
19744 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19751 \begin_layout Subsection
19752 Grouping of Image Settings
19753 \begin_inset Index idx
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19757 Images ! Settings grouping
19765 \begin_layout Standard
19766 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19768 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19769 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19771 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19772 need to manually change each of them.
19776 \begin_layout Standard
19777 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19780 \begin_inset space ~
19784 \begin_inset space ~
19796 \begin_inset space ~
19800 \begin_inset space ~
19806 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19807 and checking the name of the desired group.
19810 \begin_layout Section
19812 \begin_inset Index idx
19815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19831 \begin_layout Standard
19832 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19835 arg "tabular-insert"
19840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19844 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19845 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19846 from the rest of the table.
19847 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19848 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19850 Here is an example table:
19853 \begin_layout Standard
19855 \begin_inset Tabular
19856 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19857 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19858 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19859 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19861 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 \begin_layout Subsection
20065 \begin_layout Standard
20066 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20069 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20073 This brings up the table dialog.
20074 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20075 cursor is placed currently.
20076 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20077 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20078 done on all of your selection.
20081 \begin_layout Standard
20082 In addition to the table dialog, the
20085 \begin_inset space ~
20090 helps you in setting table properties.
20091 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20094 \begin_layout Standard
20098 \begin_inset space ~
20103 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20104 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20105 current cell respectively.
20106 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20108 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20109 of text, see section
20110 \begin_inset space ~
20114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20116 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20123 \begin_layout Standard
20124 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20125 using the check box
20134 This will merge the cells to
20138 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20139 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20140 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20141 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20142 in the last row without the upper border:
20145 \begin_layout Standard
20147 \begin_inset Tabular
20148 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20149 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20150 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20151 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20152 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20164 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20249 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20284 \begin_layout Standard
20285 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20286 -arguments for the table.
20287 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20288 explained in the chapter
20295 \begin_inset space ~
20301 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20302 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20303 but are visible in the output.
20306 \begin_layout Standard
20307 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 Most DVI-viewers are
20319 able to display rotations.
20327 \begin_layout Standard
20332 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20337 adds lines for all cell borders.
20340 \begin_layout Subsection
20342 \begin_inset Index idx
20345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20346 Tables ! Multi-page
20352 \begin_inset Index idx
20355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20364 \begin_layout Standard
20365 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20368 \begin_inset space ~
20372 \begin_inset space ~
20380 \begin_inset space ~
20385 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20386 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20389 \begin_layout Description
20394 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20395 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20396 Except for the first page, if
20399 \begin_inset space ~
20407 \begin_layout Description
20411 \begin_inset space ~
20416 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20417 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20420 \begin_layout Description
20425 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20426 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20427 except for the last page, if
20430 \begin_inset space ~
20438 \begin_layout Description
20442 \begin_inset space ~
20447 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20448 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20451 \begin_layout Description
20452 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20453 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20455 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20459 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20462 \begin_inset space ~
20470 \begin_layout Standard
20471 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20472 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20473 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20479 In this context, first means first in this order:
20482 \begin_inset space ~
20494 \begin_inset space ~
20499 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20502 \begin_layout Standard
20504 \begin_inset Tabular
20505 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20506 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20507 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20508 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20509 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20510 <row endfirsthead="true">
20511 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20517 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20522 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20531 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20541 <row endfirsthead="true">
20542 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20553 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <row endhead="true">
20575 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20586 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20595 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 <row endhead="true">
20606 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20638 <row endfoot="true">
20639 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20659 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21631 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21640 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21649 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21722 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21784 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21815 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21939 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21970 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22125 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22280 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22373 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22620 <row endlastfoot="true">
22621 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22632 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22641 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22658 \begin_layout Subsection
22660 \begin_inset Index idx
22663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22672 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22679 \begin_layout Standard
22680 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22681 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22682 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22683 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22687 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22690 \begin_layout Standard
22691 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22692 for the column in the table dialog.
22693 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22694 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22698 \begin_layout Standard
22700 \begin_inset Tabular
22701 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22702 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22703 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22704 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22705 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22725 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22794 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22850 This is longer now.
22855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22906 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22907 This is longer now.
22912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22938 \begin_layout Standard
22939 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22940 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22945 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22946 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22952 Selection with the mouse or with
22956 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22957 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22958 the selection from outside the table.
22961 \begin_layout Section
22963 \begin_inset Index idx
22966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22982 \begin_layout Subsection
22986 \begin_layout Standard
22987 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22988 have a fixed location.
22990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22997 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23005 \begin_inset space ~
23010 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23011 too many notes on the current page.
23014 \begin_layout Standard
23015 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23016 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23017 and pages without text.
23018 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23019 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23020 Floats are therefore numbered.
23021 Referencing is described in section
23022 \begin_inset space ~
23026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23028 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23035 \begin_layout Standard
23036 To insert a float, use the menu
23038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23042 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23043 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23045 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23046 \begin_inset Index idx
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23055 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23056 paragraph within the float.
23057 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23058 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23059 left-clicking on the box label.
23060 A closed float box looks like this:
23061 \begin_inset Graphics
23062 filename clipart/float.png
23067 – a gray button with a red label.
23070 \begin_layout Standard
23071 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23073 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23076 \begin_layout Subsection
23078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23080 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23085 \begin_inset Index idx
23088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23089 Floats ! Figure floats
23097 \begin_layout Standard
23099 \begin_inset space ~
23103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23105 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23109 was created using the menu
23111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23112 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23118 arg "float-insert figure"
23122 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23131 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23135 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23136 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23138 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23140 \begin_inset space ~
23148 arg "layout-paragraph"
23154 \begin_layout Standard
23155 \begin_inset Float figure
23160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23162 \begin_inset Graphics
23163 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23173 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23178 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23182 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23195 \begin_layout Standard
23196 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23197 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23208 ) and refer to it using the menu
23210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23216 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23220 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23221 vague references like
23222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23229 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23230 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23240 For more about cross-references, see section
23241 \begin_inset space ~
23245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23247 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23254 \begin_layout Standard
23255 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23256 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23257 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23258 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23259 as described in section
23260 \begin_inset space ~
23264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23266 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23272 \begin_inset space ~
23276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23278 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23282 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23283 You can also set the images one below the other.
23285 \begin_inset space ~
23289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23291 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23298 reference "fig:Platypus"
23302 are the subfigures.
23305 \begin_layout Standard
23306 \begin_inset Float figure
23311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23312 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23316 \begin_inset Float figure
23321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23322 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23327 name "fig:Undefinable"
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23340 \begin_inset Graphics
23341 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23352 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23356 \begin_inset Float figure
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23362 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23367 name "fig:Platypus"
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23380 \begin_inset Graphics
23381 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23393 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23405 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23409 Two distorted images.
23422 \begin_layout Subsection
23424 \begin_inset Index idx
23427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23428 Floats ! Table floats
23436 \begin_layout Standard
23437 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23439 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23440 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23443 or the toolbar button
23446 arg "float-insert table"
23450 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23451 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23452 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23454 \begin_inset space ~
23458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23460 reference "tab:Table-float"
23467 \begin_layout Standard
23468 \begin_inset Float table
23473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23479 name "tab:Table-float"
23491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23493 \begin_inset Tabular
23494 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23495 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23496 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23497 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23498 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23625 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23649 \end{array}\right]$
23657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23670 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23691 \begin_layout Subsection
23693 \begin_inset Index idx
23696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23705 \begin_layout Standard
23707 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23708 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23709 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23711 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23719 \begin_inset space ~
23727 \begin_layout Section
23729 \begin_inset Index idx
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23741 \begin_layout Standard
23743 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23745 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23746 \begin_inset space \space{}
23753 \begin_layout Standard
23754 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23755 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23757 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23761 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23762 and its alignment within the page.
23765 \begin_layout Standard
23767 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23777 height_special "totalheight"
23782 backgroundcolor "none"
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 This is a minipage.
23789 The text is set in an italic style.
23792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23795 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23796 another formatting.
23804 \begin_layout Standard
23805 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23808 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23812 as described in section
23813 \begin_inset space ~
23817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23819 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23824 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23830 \begin_layout Standard
23831 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23841 height_special "totalheight"
23846 backgroundcolor "none"
23849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23851 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23857 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23861 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23871 height_special "totalheight"
23876 backgroundcolor "none"
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23880 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23881 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23889 \begin_layout Standard
23890 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23896 \begin_layout Standard
23897 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23899 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23906 \begin_inset space ~
23914 \begin_layout Chapter
23915 Mathematical Formulas
23916 \begin_inset Index idx
23919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 \begin_inset Index idx
23929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23960 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23967 \begin_layout Standard
23968 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23973 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23976 \begin_layout Section
23978 \begin_inset Index idx
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23990 \begin_layout Standard
23991 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24004 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24006 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24007 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24008 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24016 \begin_layout Standard
24017 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24021 \begin_inset space ~
24026 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24029 \begin_layout Standard
24030 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24031 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24034 \begin_layout Standard
24035 This is a line with an inline formula
24036 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24042 \begin_layout Standard
24043 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24044 paragraph, like this one:
24045 \begin_inset Formula
24052 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24055 \begin_layout Standard
24057 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24059 For example, typing
24060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24073 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24074 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24078 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24081 \begin_inset space ~
24089 \begin_layout Subsection
24090 Navigating in Formulas
24091 \begin_inset Index idx
24094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24103 \begin_layout Standard
24104 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24105 achieved with the arrow keys.
24107 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24108 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24113 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24114 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24118 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24122 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24125 \end{array}\right]$
24133 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24138 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24139 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24142 \begin_layout Standard
24147 , printed in this document as
24148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24152 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24159 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24160 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24161 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24166 For example, if you want
24167 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24175 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24185 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24189 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24194 , since in the latter case only the
24197 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24202 will be under the square root sign:
24203 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24209 \begin_layout Standard
24210 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24212 \begin_inset Formula
24214 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24223 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24224 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24227 \begin_layout Subsection
24231 \begin_layout Standard
24232 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24233 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24237 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24238 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24239 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24240 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24241 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24245 \begin_layout Subsection
24246 Exponents and Subscripts
24247 \begin_inset Index idx
24250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24257 \begin_inset Index idx
24260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24269 \begin_layout Standard
24270 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24273 arg "math-superscript"
24279 arg "math-subscript"
24282 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24284 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24287 , type in a formula
24290 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24300 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24306 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24310 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24316 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24322 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24331 , you have to use an extra
24335 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24336 For example, if you want
24337 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24343 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24349 Subscripts are similar: To get
24350 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24356 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24364 \begin_layout Subsection
24366 \begin_inset Index idx
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24378 \begin_layout Standard
24379 Create a fraction either with the command
24385 or by using the icon
24388 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24394 \begin_inset space ~
24400 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24401 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24402 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24407 To move back up, press
24412 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24413 \begin_inset Formula
24415 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24418 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24426 \begin_layout Subsection
24428 \begin_inset Index idx
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24440 \begin_layout Standard
24441 Roots can be created using the
24444 \begin_inset space ~
24452 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24458 arg "math-insert \\root"
24480 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24486 always produces a square root.
24489 \begin_layout Subsection
24490 Operators with Limits
24491 \begin_inset Index idx
24494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24501 \begin_inset Index idx
24504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24513 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24520 \begin_layout Standard
24522 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24526 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24529 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24530 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24531 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24532 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24533 The sum operator will automatically place its
24534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24541 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24543 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24547 \begin_inset Formula
24549 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24554 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24558 \begin_layout Standard
24559 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24561 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24562 behind the operator and using the menu
24564 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24565 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24567 \begin_inset space ~
24571 \begin_inset space ~
24585 \begin_layout Standard
24586 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24595 \begin_inset Index idx
24598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 \begin_inset Formula
24607 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24612 which will place the
24613 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24625 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24626 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24632 \begin_layout Standard
24633 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24640 Have a look at section
24641 \begin_inset space ~
24645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24647 reference "subsec:Functions"
24651 for an explanation of function macros.
24654 \begin_layout Subsection
24656 \begin_inset Index idx
24659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24668 \begin_layout Standard
24669 Most math symbols can be found in the
24672 \begin_inset space ~
24677 under one of several categories; including
24694 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24698 \begin_layout Standard
24699 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24700 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24701 don't have to use the
24704 \begin_inset space ~
24709 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24711 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24714 \begin_layout Subsection
24716 \begin_inset Index idx
24719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24728 \begin_layout Standard
24729 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24735 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24741 \begin_inset space ~
24749 arg "math-insert \\space"
24753 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24754 For example, the sequence
24759 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24762 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24764 \begin_inset Graphics
24765 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24770 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24771 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24772 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24773 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24774 , because they are negative
24776 Here are two examples:
24779 \begin_layout Standard
24789 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24795 \begin_layout Standard
24805 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24811 \begin_layout Subsection
24813 \begin_inset Index idx
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24825 name "subsec:Functions"
24832 \begin_layout Standard
24836 \begin_inset space ~
24841 contains under the button
24844 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24847 a number of function macros, such as
24848 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24852 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24860 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24867 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24868 avoid confusions, because
24869 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24873 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24879 \begin_layout Standard
24880 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24882 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24886 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24892 \begin_layout Standard
24893 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24894 are placed, as described in section
24895 \begin_inset space ~
24899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24901 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24908 \begin_layout Subsection
24910 \begin_inset Index idx
24913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24922 \begin_layout Standard
24923 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24925 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24926 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24927 commands, for example, to enter
24928 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24931 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24932 Our example is entered by typing
24937 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24944 \begin_inset space ~
24948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24950 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24954 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24957 \begin_layout Standard
24958 \begin_inset Float table
24963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24964 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24969 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24973 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24983 \begin_inset Tabular
24984 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24985 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24986 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24987 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24988 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25072 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25126 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25180 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25234 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25288 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25342 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25396 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25450 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25504 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25549 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25570 \begin_layout Standard
25571 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25574 \begin_inset space ~
25582 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25585 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25589 \begin_layout Section
25590 Brackets and Delimiters
25591 \begin_inset Index idx
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25601 \begin_inset Index idx
25604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25613 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25620 \begin_layout Standard
25621 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25623 For some purposes, using just the keys
25628 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25629 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25630 toolbar delimiter icon
25633 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25637 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25638 \begin_inset Formula
25640 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25648 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25649 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25653 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25656 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25662 \begin_inset Formula
25664 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25672 \begin_layout Standard
25673 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25674 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25678 \begin_layout Standard
25679 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25680 left side and right side.
25681 If you use the option
25684 \begin_inset space ~
25689 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25690 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25692 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25697 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25698 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25701 \begin_layout Standard
25702 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25703 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25704 is to go inside the brackets.
25705 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25710 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25711 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25712 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25716 arg "math-delim ( )"
25722 \begin_layout Section
25723 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25724 \begin_inset Index idx
25727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25734 \begin_inset Index idx
25737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25744 \begin_inset Index idx
25747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25748 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25756 \begin_layout Standard
25757 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25761 \begin_inset space ~
25769 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25773 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25774 Here is an example:
25775 \begin_inset Formula
25777 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25786 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25787 \begin_inset space ~
25791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25793 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25798 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25799 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25800 This alignment is set in the box
25805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25854 for every column as default.
25855 For example, the sequence
25856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25867 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25868 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25869 corresponds to the relevant column.
25870 The result will look like this:
25871 \begin_inset Formula
25874 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25875 column & has & has\,right\\
25876 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25885 \begin_layout Standard
25886 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25889 arg "newline-insert newline"
25892 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25893 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25898 or the math toolbar.
25901 \begin_layout Standard
25902 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25903 It can be created with the menu
25905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25906 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25908 \begin_inset space ~
25920 Here is an example:
25921 \begin_inset Formula
25935 \begin_layout Standard
25936 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25939 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25942 arg "newline-insert newline"
25946 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25951 arg "newline-insert newline"
25954 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25962 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25963 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25964 A new row is created by every further entry of
25967 arg "newline-insert newline"
25971 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25972 Here is an example:
25973 \begin_inset Formula
25975 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25976 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25981 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25982 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25983 \begin_inset Formula
25985 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25993 \begin_layout Standard
25994 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26001 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26002 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26005 reference "eq:asquared"
26010 The other types are described in section
26011 \begin_inset space ~
26015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26017 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26024 \begin_layout Section
26025 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26026 \begin_inset Index idx
26029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26030 Math ! Formula numbering
26036 \begin_inset Index idx
26039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26040 Math ! Referencing formulas
26046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26048 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26055 \begin_layout Standard
26056 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26058 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26059 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26061 \begin_inset space ~
26065 \begin_inset space ~
26073 arg "math-number-toggle"
26077 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26078 within parentheses.
26079 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26080 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26081 the document class.
26082 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26083 separated by a dot:
26084 \begin_inset Formula
26094 arg "math-number-toggle"
26097 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26098 You can only number displayed formulas.
26101 \begin_layout Standard
26102 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26104 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26105 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26107 \begin_inset space ~
26111 \begin_inset space ~
26119 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26122 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26123 \begin_inset Formula
26126 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26132 To number all lines use the shortcut
26135 arg "math-number-toggle"
26141 \begin_layout Standard
26142 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26145 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26146 A label is inserted with the menu
26148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26157 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26158 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26159 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26171 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26172 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26173 We inserted in the following example the label
26174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26181 in the second line:
26182 \begin_inset Formula
26184 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26185 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26190 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26191 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26192 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26196 \begin_inset space ~
26204 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26208 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26209 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26210 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26211 as the formula number:
26214 \begin_layout Standard
26215 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26218 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26225 \begin_layout Standard
26226 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26227 's cross-reference box are described in section
26228 \begin_inset space ~
26232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26234 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26239 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26247 \begin_layout Section
26248 User defined math macros
26249 \begin_inset Index idx
26252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26261 \begin_layout Standard
26263 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26264 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26265 Math macros are explained in section
26268 \begin_inset space ~
26280 \begin_layout Section
26284 \begin_layout Subsection
26286 \begin_inset Index idx
26289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26298 \begin_layout Standard
26299 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26300 To set a font in a formula, use the
26303 \begin_inset space ~
26311 arg "math-insert \\font"
26314 , or enter its command, listed in table
26315 \begin_inset space ~
26319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26321 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26328 \begin_layout Standard
26329 \begin_inset Float table
26334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26335 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26340 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26344 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26354 \begin_inset Tabular
26355 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26356 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26357 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26358 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26390 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26417 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26444 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26477 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26504 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26531 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26565 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26592 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26626 \begin_layout Standard
26627 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26635 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26651 \begin_layout Standard
26652 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26653 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26658 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26659 space when you need a space in the box.
26660 Here is an example where
26661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26672 denotes the set of numbers:
26673 \begin_inset Formula
26675 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26683 \begin_layout Standard
26684 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26685 You can, for example, put a character in
26694 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26698 \begin_inset Newline newline
26701 So it is better not to use this feature.
26704 \begin_layout Standard
26705 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26706 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26710 \begin_inset Newline newline
26713 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26719 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26720 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26726 \begin_layout Standard
26733 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26736 \begin_layout Standard
26737 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26739 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26740 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26742 \begin_inset space ~
26750 \begin_layout Subsection
26752 \begin_inset Index idx
26755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26764 \begin_layout Standard
26765 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26767 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26771 \begin_inset space ~
26775 \begin_inset space ~
26783 \begin_inset space ~
26791 arg "math-insert \\font"
26795 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26796 in black instead of blue.
26797 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26798 Here is an example:
26799 \begin_inset Formula
26802 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26803 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26812 \begin_layout Subsection
26814 \begin_inset Index idx
26817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26826 \begin_layout Standard
26827 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26828 automatically chosen in most situations.
26846 For most characters,
26854 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26855 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26860 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26861 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26862 thinks are appropriate.
26863 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26866 arg "math-insert \\style"
26870 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26871 For example, you can set
26872 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26875 , which is normally in
26884 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26888 The four styles are used in the following example:
26891 \begin_layout Standard
26892 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26896 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26900 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26904 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26910 \begin_layout Standard
26911 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26912 is set in a particular size with the menu
26914 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26916 \begin_inset space ~
26921 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26922 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26923 will be adjusted to correspond.
26924 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26935 \begin_layout Standard
26939 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26945 \begin_layout Section
26946 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26948 \begin_inset Index idx
26951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26958 \begin_inset Index idx
26961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26970 \begin_layout Standard
26972 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26973 that are in common use.
26976 \begin_layout Subsection
26977 Enabling AMS-Support
26980 \begin_layout Standard
26981 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26982 the document by selecting the checkbox
26985 \begin_inset space ~
26989 \begin_inset space ~
26993 \begin_inset space ~
27000 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27004 \begin_inset Index idx
27007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27008 Document ! Settings
27016 \begin_inset space ~
27022 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27023 -errors in formulas,
27024 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27027 \begin_layout Subsection
27029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27031 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27036 \begin_inset Index idx
27039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27040 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27048 \begin_layout Standard
27049 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27050 provides a selection of different formula types.
27052 allows you to choose between
27073 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27074 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27081 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27084 \begin_layout Chapter
27088 \begin_layout Section
27090 \begin_inset Index idx
27093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27102 name "sec:Cross-References"
27109 \begin_layout Standard
27110 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27111 's strengths is cross-references.
27112 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27114 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27115 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27116 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27119 \begin_layout Enumerate
27123 \begin_layout Enumerate
27124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27126 name "enu:Second-item"
27133 \begin_layout Enumerate
27137 \begin_layout Standard
27138 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27140 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27143 or by pressing the toolbar button
27150 A gray label box like this:
27151 \begin_inset Graphics
27152 filename clipart/label.png
27156 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27158 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27193 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27194 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27210 \begin_layout Standard
27211 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27216 or the toolbar button
27219 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27223 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27224 \begin_inset Graphics
27225 filename clipart/reference.png
27229 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27231 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27244 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27248 \begin_layout Standard
27249 As an alternative to
27251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27254 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27259 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27260 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27262 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27274 \begin_layout Standard
27275 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27276 \begin_inset space ~
27280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27282 reference "enu:Second-item"
27289 \begin_layout Standard
27290 It is recommended to use a protected space
27294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27295 described in section
27296 \begin_inset space ~
27300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27302 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27311 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27312 line breaks between them.
27315 \begin_layout Standard
27316 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27319 \begin_layout Description
27320 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27323 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27330 \begin_layout Description
27331 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27332 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27344 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27351 \begin_layout Description
27352 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27353 \begin_inset space ~
27357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27358 LatexCommand pageref
27359 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27366 \begin_layout Description
27368 \begin_inset space ~
27372 \begin_inset space ~
27375 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27377 LatexCommand vpageref
27378 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27383 \begin_inset Newline newline
27386 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27387 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27388 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27389 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27390 it prints “on the next page”.
27391 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27394 \begin_layout Description
27396 \begin_inset space ~
27400 \begin_inset space ~
27404 \begin_inset space ~
27407 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27410 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27415 \begin_inset Newline newline
27418 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27424 ; otherwise it behaves like
27428 \begin_inset space ~
27432 \begin_inset space ~
27441 \begin_layout Description
27443 \begin_inset space ~
27446 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27447 \begin_inset Newline newline
27451 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27459 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27469 \begin_inset Index idx
27472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27474 -packages ! prettyref
27480 \begin_inset Index idx
27483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27485 -packages ! refstyle
27496 \begin_inset Newline newline
27499 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27500 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27503 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27507 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27508 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27516 is the default and preferred because
27520 supports only English documents.
27521 The format is specified by using the command
27533 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27534 preamble of the document.
27535 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27553 \begin_inset Newline newline
27560 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27565 \begin_inset Newline newline
27576 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27577 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27579 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27580 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27585 , you might do so as follows:
27586 \begin_inset Newline newline
27593 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27598 \begin_inset Newline newline
27601 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27602 the package documentation
27603 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27605 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27611 \begin_inset Newline newline
27622 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27629 \begin_layout Description
27631 \begin_inset space ~
27634 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27636 LatexCommand nameref
27637 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27644 \begin_layout Description
27646 \begin_inset space ~
27649 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27650 label for the reference:
27651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27652 LatexCommand labelonly
27653 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27658 \begin_inset Newline newline
27661 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27662 Code, if you want to issue a command
27663 that \SpecialChar LyX
27669 , then you may want to use the
27672 \begin_inset space ~
27677 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27687 This is the form needed for e.
27688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27692 \begin_inset space \space{}
27699 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27700 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27702 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27706 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27710 \begin_layout Standard
27711 You can only use the style
27715 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27719 is always possible.
27722 \begin_layout Standard
27723 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27724 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27726 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27727 \begin_inset space ~
27731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27733 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27740 \begin_layout Standard
27741 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27745 \begin_inset space ~
27749 \begin_inset space ~
27754 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27755 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27758 \begin_inset space ~
27763 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27764 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27767 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27773 \begin_layout Standard
27774 You can change labels at any time.
27775 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27776 do not need to think about this.
27779 \begin_layout Standard
27780 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27782 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27786 \begin_layout Standard
27787 References are described in detail in the section
27788 \begin_inset space ~
27798 \begin_inset space ~
27806 \begin_layout Section
27807 Table of Contents and other Listings
27808 \begin_inset Index idx
27811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27818 \begin_inset Index idx
27821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27822 Navigating ! Outline
27828 \begin_inset Index idx
27831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27847 \begin_layout Subsection
27849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27851 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27858 \begin_layout Standard
27859 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27862 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27864 \begin_inset space ~
27868 \begin_inset space ~
27874 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27876 If you click on it, the
27880 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27881 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27882 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27884 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27886 \begin_inset space ~
27891 that is described in section
27892 \begin_inset space ~
27896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27898 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27905 \begin_layout Standard
27906 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27907 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27909 \begin_inset space ~
27913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27915 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27919 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27921 \begin_inset space ~
27925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27927 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27931 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27933 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27936 \begin_layout Subsection
27937 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27940 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27947 \begin_layout Standard
27948 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27950 You can insert them via the
27952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27956 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27959 \begin_layout Section
27960 URLs and Hyperlinks
27961 \begin_inset Index idx
27964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27971 \begin_inset Index idx
27974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27983 \begin_layout Subsection
27985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27994 \begin_layout Standard
27995 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28003 \begin_layout Standard
28004 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28006 \begin_inset Flex URL
28009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28019 \begin_layout Standard
28020 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28026 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28030 \begin_layout Standard
28031 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28039 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28048 \begin_layout Subsection
28050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28052 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28059 \begin_layout Standard
28060 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28065 or with the toolbar button
28072 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28081 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28082 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28083 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28085 name "LyX's homepage"
28086 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28091 , an Email address like this:
28092 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28094 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28095 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28101 , or a link to a file.
28104 \begin_layout Standard
28105 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28118 to the link target.
28121 \begin_layout Standard
28122 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28123 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28124 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28125 the text style dialog.
28126 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28132 name "LyX's homepage"
28133 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28141 \begin_layout Standard
28142 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28146 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28149 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28153 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28155 \begin_inset Newline newline
28163 \begin_inset Newline newline
28170 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28173 \begin_layout Section
28175 \begin_inset Index idx
28178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28187 name "sec:Appendices"
28194 \begin_layout Standard
28195 Appendices are created with the menu
28197 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28199 \begin_inset space ~
28203 \begin_inset space ~
28209 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28210 as the appendix part of the book.
28211 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28214 \begin_layout Standard
28215 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28216 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28217 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28218 and the subsection number.
28219 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28223 \begin_layout Standard
28225 \begin_inset space ~
28229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28231 reference "chap:Credits"
28236 \begin_inset space ~
28240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28242 reference "subsec:Export"
28249 \begin_layout Section
28251 \begin_inset Index idx
28254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28263 name "sec:Bibliography"
28270 \begin_layout Standard
28271 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28273 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28274 \begin_inset space ~
28278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28280 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28287 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28292 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28293 \begin_inset space ~
28297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28299 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28304 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28306 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28308 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28311 author-year citations,
28312 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28313 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28316 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28318 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28319 should seriously consider
28326 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28328 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28331 a bibliography database.
28332 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28336 \begin_layout Standard
28338 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28339 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28340 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28344 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28345 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28346 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28347 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28348 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28353 \begin_layout Subsection
28354 The Bibliography Environment
28355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28357 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28364 \begin_layout Standard
28369 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28371 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28380 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28383 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28384 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28385 of ASCII characters only.
28388 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28398 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28399 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28403 \begin_layout Standard
28404 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28406 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28409 or the toolbar button
28412 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28416 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28417 containing the available citations.
28418 Select one or more keys from the list and
28428 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28429 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28434 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28435 entry with surrounding brackets.
28440 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28441 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28453 \begin_layout Standard
28457 Companion Second Edition
28460 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28462 key "latexcompanion"
28470 \begin_layout Standard
28471 The \SpecialChar LyX
28472 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28473 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28481 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28485 \begin_layout Standard
28487 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28488 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28493 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28505 Author A and Author B(Year)
28506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28513 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28515 Then, if you select
28521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28525 \begin_inset Index idx
28528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28530 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28531 Document ! Settings
28538 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28544 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28551 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28556 \begin_layout Standard
28557 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28560 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28562 \begin_inset space ~
28570 arg "layout-paragraph"
28574 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28577 \begin_layout Subsection
28578 Bibliography databases
28579 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28580 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28584 \begin_inset Index idx
28587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28588 Bibliography ! Databases
28594 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28596 \begin_inset Index idx
28599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28600 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28611 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28618 \begin_layout Standard
28619 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28620 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28622 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28625 in different documents.
28629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28630 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28632 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28633 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28638 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28640 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28641 your working field in a database.
28642 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28643 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28644 list for that document.
28645 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28650 The database is a text file with the file extension
28651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28662 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28663 The format is explained in
28664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28671 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28673 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28675 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28681 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28682 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28683 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28685 \begin_inset Flex URL
28688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28690 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28696 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28700 \begin_layout Standard
28702 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28704 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28705 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28706 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28708 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28709 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28710 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28712 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28721 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28722 (although it has been significantly
28723 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28730 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28735 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28736 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28737 might conversely fail to correctly
28738 handle databases that use specific
28749 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28753 \begin_layout Standard
28755 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28756 Both approaches are described in turn.
28759 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28761 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28762 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28764 \begin_inset Index idx
28767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28769 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28770 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28781 \begin_layout Standard
28783 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28785 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28789 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28790 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28800 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28802 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28806 \begin_inset space ~
28812 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28813 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28814 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28815 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28825 Add bibliography to TOC
28827 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28832 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28833 in the document or just the cited references.
28836 \begin_layout Standard
28838 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28839 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28842 style file is a text file with the file extension
28843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28854 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28855 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28856 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28857 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28859 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28865 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28866 \begin_inset Newline newline
28870 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28872 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28883 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
28884 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28889 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28895 \begin_layout Standard
28896 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28897 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
28901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28903 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
28905 \begin_inset Index idx
28908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28910 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
28911 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28919 \begin_layout Standard
28921 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
28922 Accessing a database via
28926 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28934 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28936 \begin_inset space ~
28942 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28943 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28945 you cannot select a
28949 file (we will explain later, why).
28950 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28953 Add bibliography to TOC
28955 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28960 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28961 in the document or just the cited references.
28964 \begin_layout Standard
28966 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
28971 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
28973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28984 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
28986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28997 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
28998 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
28999 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
29000 bibliography style.
29003 \begin_layout Standard
29005 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
29010 styles are not set in the
29013 \begin_inset space ~
29024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29025 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29029 However, in the former dialog (in the
29033 field which is only visible if you use
29037 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
29038 (for instance concerning its heading).
29039 These options are detailed in the
29044 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29056 \begin_layout Standard
29058 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
29059 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29060 \begin_inset space ~
29064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29066 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environmentfg"
29076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29078 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
29079 Bibliography Processors
29082 \begin_layout Standard
29083 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29085 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
29086 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
29087 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
29092 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
29094 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
29098 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
29104 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
29105 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
29109 \begin_layout Standard
29111 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
29112 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
29114 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29115 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
29116 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29121 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
29122 do this on a general level in
29124 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29125 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29126 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29129 , or for individual documents
29130 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
29131 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
29140 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29141 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29143 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
29148 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29149 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29150 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29156 The following variants are
29157 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
29159 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
29160 available by default
29165 \begin_layout Description
29167 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
29168 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
29172 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29180 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
29181 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
29182 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
29183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29187 \begin_inset space \space{}
29194 ), only with the package
29197 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
29200 and many specific features
29207 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
29208 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
29210 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
29215 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29224 \begin_layout Description
29225 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29226 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29227 with all bibliography packages,
29228 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
29230 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
29234 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
29235 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
29236 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
29238 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
29244 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
29247 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
29252 \begin_layout Description
29253 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29254 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
29255 (but no Unicode support)
29257 , larger memory than
29261 , works with all bibliography packages
29262 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
29263 , although more complex
29267 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29271 features are supported.
29274 \begin_layout Standard
29276 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
29278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29285 bibliography processor set in
29287 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29288 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29299 bibliography processor in
29301 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29302 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29303 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29306 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29307 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29316 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29317 -based bibliography styles).
29318 This should suit most needs.
29323 \begin_layout Standard
29325 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29326 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29327 By default, this is
29335 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29336 You can adjust it in
29338 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29339 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29340 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29348 \begin_layout Standard
29350 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29351 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29353 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29354 Selected bibliography processors
29356 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29357 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29358 specification of the variants
29359 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29363 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29365 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29369 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29372 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29374 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29380 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29382 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29390 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29402 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29406 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29408 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29414 \begin_layout Standard
29416 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29418 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29421 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29422 When you select the option
29424 Sectioned bibliography
29428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29429 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29432 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29436 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29438 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29442 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29446 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29449 are explained in detail in section
29451 Customizing Bibliographies
29455 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29457 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054457
29464 Additional Features
29469 \begin_layout Standard
29471 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29472 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29473 the two methods of creating them.
29474 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29475 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29476 We used the style file
29480 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29485 \begin_layout Subsection
29487 \begin_inset Index idx
29490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29491 Bibliography ! Citation format
29497 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29501 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29510 \begin_layout Standard
29512 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29513 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29518 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29527 ) or author-year citations (as
29528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29537 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29541 \begin_layout Standard
29543 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29544 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29551 \begin_inset Index idx
29554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29556 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29557 Document ! Settings
29564 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29567 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29568 bibliography approach.
29571 \begin_layout Standard
29573 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29578 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29583 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29587 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environmentfg"
29594 \begin_layout Standard
29596 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29597 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29605 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29613 Currently, the following options are available:
29616 \begin_layout Itemize
29618 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29625 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29629 \begin_layout Itemize
29631 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29640 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29642 Biblatex citation style
29646 Biblatex bibliography style
29649 Many different style variants are supported.
29654 package can be entered in the
29661 \begin_layout Itemize
29663 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29666 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29676 natbib compatibility mode
29677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29681 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29686 (see below) or want to emulate
29690 behavior very closely.
29695 , this option has some additional styles.
29696 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29701 styles are also supported by this variant.
29704 \begin_layout Itemize
29706 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29715 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29718 \begin_layout Itemize
29720 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29729 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29734 \begin_layout Standard
29736 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29745 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29747 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29752 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29754 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29755 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29772 , a suitable style is proposed).
29777 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29781 \begin_layout Standard
29783 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29784 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29786 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29788 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29791 n the citation reference dialog
29792 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29793 you can set a special citation format
29797 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29798 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29799 a name prefix such as
29800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29815 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29819 e., use or don't use
29820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29829 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29830 For this feature you need to enable the option
29836 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29840 \begin_inset Index idx
29843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29844 Document ! Settings
29854 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29855 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29856 style files as explained in
29857 the previous section.
29862 \begin_layout Standard
29864 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
29865 In the citation dialog,
29866 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
29868 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
29871 ou can also set text to appear
29872 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
29875 after a citation reference,
29876 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
29877 in the citation reference window
29878 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
29880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29884 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29902 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
29904 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
29907 example where the text
29908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29912 \begin_inset space ~
29916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29919 appears after the reference:
29922 \begin_layout Quote
29924 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29927 key "latexcompanion"
29933 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
29937 \begin_layout Standard
29939 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054733
29940 All styles except for
29944 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
29945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29953 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29957 \begin_layout Standard
29959 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998495
29960 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29961 That is to say, if you refer to multiple references at one, the prenote
29962 will precede the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the
29968 styles allow for adding pre- and postnotes to any individual reference
29969 in a multi-citation (so-called
29970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29973 qualified citation lists
29974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29980 If you use such a style, and if the current reference includes multiple
29982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29989 window will display three columns:
29990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30014 If you double-click on an item's
30015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30030 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30035 General text before
30036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30047 input widgets, you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30052 \begin_layout Section
30054 \begin_inset Index idx
30057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30073 \begin_layout Standard
30074 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30078 \begin_inset space ~
30083 or the toolbar button
30090 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30091 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30092 by \SpecialChar LyX
30093 as the index entry.
30096 \begin_layout Standard
30097 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30100 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30102 \begin_inset space ~
30108 A light blue box labeled
30109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30120 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30121 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30125 \begin_layout Standard
30126 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30127 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30128 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30129 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30131 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30133 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30141 \begin_layout Subsection
30142 Grouping Index Entries
30143 \begin_inset Index idx
30146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30155 \begin_layout Standard
30156 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30158 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30159 lists under the entry
30160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30168 First we create the entry
30169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30177 \begin_inset space ~
30181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30183 reference "subsec:Lists"
30188 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30189 \begin_inset space ~
30193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30195 reference "sec:Itemize"
30199 , we insert the command
30202 \begin_layout Standard
30208 \begin_layout Standard
30212 \begin_layout Standard
30218 \begin_layout Standard
30219 for the enumerated list in section
30220 \begin_inset space ~
30224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30226 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30233 \begin_layout Standard
30234 The exclamation mark
30235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30242 marks the grouping levels.
30243 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30244 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30245 If we don't have an index entry for
30246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30253 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30256 \begin_layout Subsection
30258 \begin_inset Index idx
30261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30262 Index ! Page ranges
30270 \begin_layout Standard
30271 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30273 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30274 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30275 an index entry in section
30276 \begin_inset space ~
30280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30282 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30289 \begin_layout Standard
30292 Paragraph environments|(
30295 \begin_layout Standard
30296 and another entry at the end of section
30297 \begin_inset space ~
30301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30303 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30310 \begin_layout Standard
30313 Paragraph environments|)
30316 \begin_layout Standard
30318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30341 respectively start and end the index range.
30342 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30343 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30344 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30345 An example is the index entry
30346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30349 Document ! Settings
30350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30356 \begin_layout Subsection
30358 \begin_inset Index idx
30361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30362 Index ! Cross referencing
30370 \begin_layout Standard
30371 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30372 We referred for example in the index entry
30373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30381 \begin_inset space ~
30385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30387 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30391 ) to the index entry
30392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30399 in the same section using the entry
30402 \begin_layout Standard
30405 GIF|see{Image formats}
30408 \begin_layout Standard
30409 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30411 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30412 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30415 \begin_layout Subsection
30417 \begin_inset Index idx
30420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30421 Index ! Entry order
30429 \begin_layout Standard
30430 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30431 follow the rules for the index order.
30432 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30438 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30440 \begin_inset space ~
30444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30446 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30455 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30456 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30481 \begin_inset Index idx
30484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30485 Dummy entries ! maïs
30491 \begin_inset Index idx
30494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30495 Dummy entries ! maître
30501 \begin_inset Index idx
30504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30505 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30510 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30511 maïs, maison, maître.
30512 To achieve this, we use the command
30515 \begin_layout Standard
30518 previous entry@current entry
30521 \begin_layout Standard
30522 In our case we want to have
30523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30538 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30541 \begin_layout Standard
30547 \begin_layout Standard
30548 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30549 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30551 See the next subsection for an example.
30554 \begin_layout Standard
30555 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30561 \begin_layout Standard
30562 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30567 to generate the index (see section
30568 \begin_inset space ~
30572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30574 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30583 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30584 -package aeguill in section
30585 \begin_inset space ~
30589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30591 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30595 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30596 -packages although all these index
30597 commands start with
30598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30611 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30616 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30619 \begin_layout Standard
30631 \begin_layout Standard
30643 \begin_layout Subsection
30645 \begin_inset Index idx
30648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30649 Index ! Entry layout
30657 \begin_layout Standard
30658 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30659 \begin_inset Index idx
30662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30665 This is an italic dummy entry
30670 You can also format the page number using the character
30671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30678 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30679 -command without a backslash.
30680 We can write for example
30683 \begin_layout Standard
30686 italic page number:|textit
30689 \begin_layout Standard
30690 to get the page number in italic.
30691 \begin_inset Index idx
30694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30695 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30700 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30701 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30719 \begin_inset space ~
30725 Have a look at section
30726 \begin_inset space ~
30730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30732 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30736 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30740 \begin_layout Standard
30741 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30749 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30753 to generate the index, see section
30754 \begin_inset space ~
30758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30760 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30769 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30774 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30775 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30778 key "latexcompanion"
30791 \begin_layout Standard
30792 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30794 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30795 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30796 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30797 If so, put the following in the preamble
30800 \begin_layout Standard
30812 \begin_layout Standard
30816 \begin_layout Standard
30822 \begin_layout Standard
30823 in the index entry.
30824 \begin_inset Index idx
30827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30828 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30833 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30834 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30835 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30838 \begin_layout Standard
30839 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30840 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30841 a bold font for all index entries.
30842 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30854 documentation for details,
30855 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30857 key "makeindex,xindy"
30865 \begin_layout Subsection
30867 \begin_inset Index idx
30870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30879 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30886 \begin_layout Standard
30887 If the index generation program
30891 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30892 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30896 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30897 distribution, is used.
30901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30906 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30907 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30908 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30909 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30910 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30920 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30922 dialog, see section
30923 \begin_inset space ~
30927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30929 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30934 The available options are listed and explained in
30935 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30937 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30943 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30947 \begin_layout Standard
30948 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30949 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30957 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30958 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30961 \begin_layout Subsection
30965 \begin_layout Standard
30966 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30967 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30975 next to the standard index.
30977 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30978 that add this feature.
30985 \begin_inset Index idx
30988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30990 -packages ! splitidx
30995 package to generate multiple indexes.
30996 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31002 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31004 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31012 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31013 style, but it also includes
31014 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31015 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31023 \begin_layout Standard
31024 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31025 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31028 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31031 and select the option
31033 Use multiple Indexes
31040 already contains the standard index
31041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31049 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31050 also appear as a heading) to the
31054 input field and press the
31059 The new index now also appears in the list.
31060 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31061 label color to the new index.
31064 \begin_layout Standard
31065 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31075 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31076 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31077 are additional features:
31080 \begin_layout Itemize
31081 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31082 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31085 \begin_layout Itemize
31086 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31087 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31095 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31096 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31097 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31098 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31101 \begin_layout Section
31102 Nomenclature/Glossary
31103 \begin_inset Index idx
31106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31113 \begin_inset Index idx
31116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31147 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31154 \begin_layout Standard
31155 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31156 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31157 called nomenclature or glossary.
31160 \begin_layout Standard
31161 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31168 \begin_inset Index idx
31171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31173 -packages ! nomencl
31179 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31181 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31188 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31192 \begin_layout Standard
31193 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31194 and then use the menu
31196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31202 \begin_inset space ~
31207 or the toolbar button
31210 arg "nomencl-insert"
31215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31226 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31229 \begin_layout Standard
31230 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31231 The first is the term or
31235 that you wish to define.
31240 of the term or symbol.
31243 \begin_layout Standard
31244 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31252 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31253 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31261 \begin_layout Subsection
31262 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31263 \begin_inset Index idx
31266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31267 Nomenclature ! Layout
31275 \begin_layout Standard
31276 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31280 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31287 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31295 \begin_inset Newline newline
31303 \begin_inset Newline newline
31309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31316 character starts/ends the formula.
31317 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31318 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31330 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31340 \begin_layout Standard
31341 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31342 -syntax is given in section
31343 \begin_inset space ~
31347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31349 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31356 \begin_layout Standard
31360 \begin_inset space ~
31365 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31367 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31372 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31379 in this document is:
31380 \begin_inset Newline newline
31385 dummy entry for the character
31390 \begin_inset Newline newline
31402 \begin_inset space ~
31412 font use the command
31441 \begin_layout Standard
31442 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31447 \begin_inset space \space{}
31451 \begin_inset Newline newline
31467 \begin_inset Newline newline
31470 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31471 This command will make the font of all symbols
31478 \begin_inset space ~
31486 \begin_layout Standard
31487 If the characters |
31488 \begin_inset space \space{}
31492 \begin_inset space \space{}
31496 \begin_inset space \space{}
31500 \begin_inset space \space{}
31504 \begin_inset space \space{}
31507 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31508 a quote character in front of them.
31509 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31510 LatexCommand nomenclature
31511 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31512 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31520 \begin_layout Subsection
31521 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31522 \begin_inset Index idx
31525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31526 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31534 \begin_layout Standard
31535 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31536 -code of the symbol
31538 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31540 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31543 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31544 LatexCommand nomenclature
31546 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31554 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31558 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31559 LatexCommand nomenclature
31562 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31568 They will be sorted by
31569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31595 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31598 will be sorted before the
31602 since the character
31603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31610 is considered in sorting.
31613 \begin_layout Standard
31614 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31617 \begin_inset space ~
31622 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31623 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31625 For the example given, you can insert
31629 in this field for the
31630 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31637 will be located before
31638 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31644 \begin_layout Standard
31645 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31650 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31660 \begin_layout Subsection
31661 Nomenclature Options
31662 \begin_inset Index idx
31665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31666 Nomenclature ! Options
31674 \begin_layout Standard
31679 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31680 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31683 \begin_layout Description
31684 refeq Appends the phrase
31685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31700 to every nomenclature entry, where
31706 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31709 \begin_layout Description
31710 refpage Appends the phrase
31711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31726 to every nomenclature entry, where
31732 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31735 \begin_layout Description
31736 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31739 \begin_layout Standard
31740 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31741 class options list in the
31743 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31747 In this document the options
31754 \begin_layout Standard
31755 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31761 \begin_layout Standard
31762 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31763 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31768 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31771 \begin_layout Description
31781 \begin_layout Description
31784 nomrefpage Like the
31791 \begin_layout Description
31794 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31803 \begin_layout Description
31807 \begin_inset space ~
31813 \begin_inset space ~
31818 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31821 \begin_layout Standard
31823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31830 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31831 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31835 \begin_layout Standard
31843 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31846 \begin_inset Newline newline
31853 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31858 \begin_inset Newline newline
31862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31877 by their translation.
31880 \begin_layout Subsection
31881 Printing the Nomenclature
31882 \begin_inset Index idx
31885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31886 Nomenclature ! Printing
31894 \begin_layout Standard
31895 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31898 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31914 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31915 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31916 You can choose between these settings:
31919 \begin_layout Description
31920 Default a space of 1
31921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31927 \begin_layout Description
31929 \begin_inset space ~
31933 \begin_inset space ~
31936 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31939 \begin_layout Description
31940 Custom custom space
31943 \begin_layout Standard
31944 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31953 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31961 For example, in order to change the name to
31965 , add the following line to the preamble:
31968 \begin_layout Standard
31976 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31979 \begin_layout Subsection
31980 Nomenclature Program
31981 \begin_inset Index idx
31984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31985 Nomenclature ! Program
31991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31993 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32000 \begin_layout Standard
32006 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32007 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32009 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32014 by adding options, see section
32015 \begin_inset space ~
32019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32021 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32026 The available options are listed and explained in
32027 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32029 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32037 \begin_layout Section
32039 \begin_inset Index idx
32042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32049 \begin_inset Index idx
32052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32053 Document ! Branches
32059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32061 name "sec:Branches"
32068 \begin_layout Standard
32069 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32070 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32071 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32072 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32075 \begin_layout Standard
32076 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32077 allows you to put text into branches.
32078 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32079 To create a branch, either select the menu
32081 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32082 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32085 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32087 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32094 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32095 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32096 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32097 and whether the name of the branch should
32098 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32099 (see below for an example).
32100 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32101 to the name of the other) and to add
32102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32114 \begin_inset space ~
32117 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32118 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32121 \begin_layout Standard
32122 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32123 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32128 where you can choose a branch.
32129 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32133 \begin_layout Standard
32134 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32135 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32138 \begin_layout Standard
32139 \begin_inset Branch Question
32143 \begin_layout Standard
32144 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32152 \begin_layout Standard
32153 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32157 \begin_layout Standard
32158 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32166 \begin_layout Standard
32173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32177 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32178 Consider for example a file
32179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32186 which has the above branches.
32188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32195 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32219 branch were inactive,
32220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32235 branch was active, likewise
32236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32251 branch was active, and
32252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32255 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32259 if both branches were active.
32260 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32261 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
32265 \begin_layout Standard
32267 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32268 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
32269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32276 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
32282 \begin_inset Branch Question
32286 \begin_layout Standard
32288 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
32289 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
32297 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32298 To control whether a particular inset is
32299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32306 , right-click on the inset button and choose
32307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32313 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32319 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
32323 \begin_layout Standard
32324 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32330 \begin_layout Standard
32331 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32332 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32333 definitions for each branch.
32334 For example you can define for the question branch
32338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32339 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32340 -syntax, see section
32341 \begin_inset space ~
32345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32347 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32359 \begin_layout Standard
32369 \begin_layout Standard
32379 \begin_layout Standard
32380 and for the answer branch
32383 \begin_layout Standard
32393 \begin_layout Standard
32403 \begin_layout Standard
32404 \begin_inset Branch Question
32408 \begin_layout Standard
32412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32440 \begin_layout Standard
32441 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32445 \begin_layout Standard
32449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32477 \begin_layout Standard
32478 Now it is possible to use the
32482 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32489 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32492 commands to obtain conditional output.
32493 Here is an example formula where only the
32500 \begin_inset Formula
32502 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32510 \begin_layout Standard
32511 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32519 \begin_layout Standard
32520 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32526 \begin_inset space \space{}
32529 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32531 For this advanced usage, see the
32537 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32542 \begin_layout Section
32544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32546 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32551 \begin_inset Index idx
32554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32563 \begin_layout Standard
32566 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32567 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32570 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32572 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32578 \begin_inset Index idx
32581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32583 -packages ! hyperref
32588 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32589 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32590 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32591 part of the document.
32595 \begin_layout Standard
32596 The header information in the dialog tab
32600 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32601 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32602 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32603 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32607 \begin_inset space ~
32611 \begin_inset space ~
32616 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32617 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32618 and author entries.
32622 \begin_inset space ~
32626 \begin_inset space ~
32630 \begin_inset space ~
32635 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32638 \begin_layout Standard
32639 You can specify in the dialog tab
32643 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32648 \begin_inset space ~
32652 \begin_inset space ~
32656 \begin_inset space ~
32661 option allows long links to be split;
32664 \begin_inset space ~
32668 \begin_inset space ~
32672 \begin_inset space ~
32680 \begin_inset space ~
32685 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32688 \begin_inset space ~
32693 colors the different links.
32694 The default colors are:
32697 \begin_layout Labeling
32698 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32703 for hyperlinks and URLs
32706 \begin_layout Labeling
32707 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32715 \begin_layout Labeling
32716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32724 \begin_layout Standard
32725 but you can change these in the field
32730 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32733 \begin_layout Standard
32736 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32739 \begin_layout Standard
32744 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32745 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32746 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32749 \begin_layout Standard
32754 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32755 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32756 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32766 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32767 when opening the PDF.
32769 \begin_inset space ~
32772 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32773 \begin_inset space ~
32776 1 will only display the sections.
32779 \begin_layout Standard
32780 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32781 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32787 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32788 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32798 \begin_layout Section
32800 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32804 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32811 \begin_layout Subsection
32814 \begin_inset Index idx
32817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32827 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32834 \begin_layout Standard
32835 As \SpecialChar LyX
32836 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32837 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32838 commands and constructs,
32841 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32842 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32843 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32844 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32845 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32846 cannot support all packages and
32850 \begin_layout Standard
32851 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32852 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32853 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32857 Code box is created by the menu
32859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32861 \begin_inset space ~
32866 or by the toolbar button
32879 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32887 \begin_layout Standard
32888 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32890 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32892 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32897 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32902 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32909 , you can write the command part
32915 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32916 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32920 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32921 Code box behind the word.
32922 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32923 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32927 \begin_layout Standard
32928 \begin_inset Graphics
32929 filename clipart/ERT.png
32937 \begin_layout Standard
32941 \begin_layout Standard
32942 This is a line with a
32946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32969 \begin_layout Standard
32970 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32978 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32979 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32980 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32981 know that the command is finished.
32989 \begin_layout Subsection
32990 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32992 \begin_inset Argument 1
32995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32996 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33003 \begin_inset Index idx
33006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33016 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33023 \begin_layout Standard
33024 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33025 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33026 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33027 uses in the background.
33028 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33029 is based on commands, you can
33030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33038 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33039 any time if you know the right commands.
33040 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33041 is the end of the day.
33042 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33043 all caption labels bold.
33044 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33046 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33050 \begin_layout Standard
33051 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33053 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33055 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33058 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33068 \begin_layout Standard
33069 As result you find that the package
33074 \begin_inset Index idx
33077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33079 -packages ! caption
33085 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33087 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33090 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33094 \begin_inset space ~
33102 \begin_layout Standard
33107 usepackage[options]{package name}
33110 \begin_layout Standard
33111 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33112 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33113 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33114 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33117 \begin_layout Standard
33118 In your case the package name is
33123 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33128 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33129 So you add the command
33132 \begin_layout Standard
33137 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33140 \begin_layout Standard
33141 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33146 For more commands provided by the
33150 package, have a look at its documentation,
33151 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33166 \begin_layout Standard
33167 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33169 For example if you use a
33173 class, you don't need the package
33177 , you can instead write
33180 \begin_layout Standard
33185 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33190 \begin_layout Standard
33191 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33192 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33193 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33200 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33203 \begin_layout Standard
33204 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33205 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33207 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33208 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33209 Code box as described in the previous
33213 \begin_layout Standard
33214 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33215 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33218 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33220 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33228 \begin_layout Standard
33229 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33235 \begin_layout Standard
33239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33249 \begin_inset Note Note
33252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33253 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33261 \begin_layout Left Header
33262 \begin_inset Argument 1
33265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33285 \begin_inset Note Note
33288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33289 defines the header line as described below
33297 \begin_layout Center Header
33298 \begin_inset Argument 1
33301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33310 \begin_layout Right Header
33311 \begin_inset Argument 1
33314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33335 \begin_layout Left Footer
33336 \begin_inset Argument 1
33339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33360 \begin_layout Center Footer
33361 \begin_inset Argument 1
33364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33376 \begin_inset Newline newline
33380 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33386 \begin_layout Right Footer
33387 \begin_inset Argument 1
33390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33412 \begin_layout Section
33413 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33416 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33421 \begin_inset Index idx
33424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33425 Document ! Header/Footer line
33431 \begin_inset Index idx
33434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33443 \begin_layout Standard
33444 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33448 \begin_inset space ~
33459 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33465 \begin_inset space ~
33471 As a second step add in the menu
33473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33474 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33483 Custom Header/Footerlines
33486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33490 This module offers the following 6
33491 \begin_inset space ~
33497 \begin_layout Description
33499 \begin_inset space ~
33503 \begin_inset space ~
33507 \begin_inset space ~
33511 \begin_inset space ~
33515 \begin_inset space ~
33521 \begin_layout Description
33523 \begin_inset space ~
33527 \begin_inset space ~
33531 \begin_inset space ~
33535 \begin_inset space ~
33539 \begin_inset space ~
33545 \begin_layout Standard
33546 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33547 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33550 \begin_layout Standard
33551 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33552 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33554 \begin_inset space ~
33558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33560 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33564 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33567 \begin_layout Standard
33568 \begin_inset Float figure
33574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33577 \begin_inset Tabular
33578 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33579 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33580 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33581 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33582 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33584 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33602 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33631 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33642 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33646 The normal text on the page goes here.
33647 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33649 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33650 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33655 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33664 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33675 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33693 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33704 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33722 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33740 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33745 name "fig:Page-layout"
33749 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33762 \begin_layout Standard
33763 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33771 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33775 \begin_inset space ~
33780 is set to “Default”.
33781 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33790 \begin_layout Subsection
33794 \begin_layout Standard
33795 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33796 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33797 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33798 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33800 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33802 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33805 \begin_layout Standard
33806 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33807 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33813 \begin_inset space ~
33821 \begin_layout Description
33824 thepage prints the current page number
33827 \begin_layout Description
33830 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33833 \begin_layout Description
33836 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33839 \begin_layout Description
33842 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33843 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33850 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33853 because it usually goes in a left header.
33856 \begin_layout Description
33859 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33860 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33862 It is normally used in the right header.
33865 \begin_layout Subsection
33866 Default header/footer
33869 \begin_layout Standard
33870 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33871 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33872 footer has the page number.
33873 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33874 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33875 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33878 \begin_inset space ~
33886 \begin_layout Subsection
33890 \begin_layout Standard
33891 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33892 Some pages are different.
33893 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33894 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33895 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33896 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33897 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33900 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33901 Header and footer decoration line
33904 \begin_layout Standard
33905 By default, you get a 0.4
33906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33909 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33910 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33922 in the following way:
33925 \begin_layout Standard
33932 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33935 \begin_layout Standard
33936 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33949 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33956 \begin_layout Standard
33957 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33959 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33960 \begin_inset space ~
33964 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33975 Several header/footer lines
33978 \begin_layout Standard
33979 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33980 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33981 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33983 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33999 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34001 \begin_inset space ~
34009 \begin_layout Standard
34016 headheight}{height}
34019 \begin_layout Standard
34024 is a size in standard units (e.
34025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34029 \begin_inset space \space{}
34037 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34038 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34039 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34040 logfile with the menu
34042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34044 \begin_inset space ~
34052 \begin_inset space ~
34057 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34062 \begin_inset Index idx
34065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34067 -packages ! fancyhdr
34073 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34074 for your header/footer.
34077 \begin_layout Subsection
34081 \begin_layout Standard
34082 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34083 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34084 This example consists of the following definition:
34087 \begin_layout Description
34089 \begin_inset space ~
34098 , empty optional argument
34101 \begin_layout Description
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34106 Header empty, empty optional argument
34109 \begin_layout Description
34111 \begin_inset space ~
34120 in the optional argument
34123 \begin_layout Description
34125 \begin_inset space ~
34134 in the optional argument
34137 \begin_layout Description
34139 \begin_inset space ~
34152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34156 \begin_inset Newline newline
34160 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34167 in the optional argument
34170 \begin_layout Description
34172 \begin_inset space ~
34181 , empty optional argument
34184 \begin_layout Description
34187 headrulewidth set to 2
34188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34195 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34196 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34202 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34212 \begin_layout Standard
34213 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34219 \begin_layout Standard
34223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34227 pagestyle{headings}
34233 \begin_inset Note Note
34236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34237 switches back to page style with the default headings
34245 \begin_layout Section
34246 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34249 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34254 \begin_inset Index idx
34257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34264 \begin_inset Index idx
34267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34278 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34279 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34280 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34283 \begin_layout Subsection
34287 \begin_layout Standard
34288 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34294 \begin_inset Index idx
34297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34299 -packages ! preview-latex
34304 (on some systems named simply
34309 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34311 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34318 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34320 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34328 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34329 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34330 -package are automatically
34331 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34335 \begin_layout Subsection
34339 \begin_layout Standard
34340 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34341 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34343 activate the option
34346 \begin_inset space ~
34353 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34359 \begin_inset space ~
34363 \begin_inset space ~
34366 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34373 \begin_inset space ~
34386 \begin_inset space ~
34391 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34394 \begin_layout Standard
34395 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34400 \begin_inset space ~
34408 \begin_inset space ~
34416 \begin_layout Standard
34417 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34418 and when you finish
34422 \begin_layout Standard
34423 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34431 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34432 generated by activating the option
34435 \begin_inset space ~
34441 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34449 \begin_layout Subsection
34450 Selected document parts
34453 \begin_layout Standard
34454 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34455 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34456 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34457 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34459 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34465 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34466 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34467 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34470 \begin_layout Standard
34471 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34478 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34490 is explained in section
34492 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34497 \begin_inset space ~
34507 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34508 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34509 the final rotated boxes,
34510 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34511 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34513 Here is the result:
34516 \begin_layout Standard
34517 \begin_inset Preview
34519 \begin_layout Standard
34524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34528 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34534 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34544 height_special "totalheight"
34549 backgroundcolor "none"
34552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34577 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34583 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34605 \begin_layout Standard
34606 Previewing works also for colors.
34607 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34626 is explained in section
34633 \begin_inset space ~
34646 \begin_layout Standard
34647 \begin_inset Preview
34649 \begin_layout Standard
34653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34672 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34677 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34696 \begin_layout Standard
34697 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34703 \begin_layout Standard
34704 If \SpecialChar LyX
34705 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34706 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34707 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34708 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34709 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34710 the \SpecialChar TeX
34712 If \SpecialChar LyX
34713 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34714 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34716 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34717 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34718 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34721 \begin_layout Subsection
34726 \begin_layout Standard
34727 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34728 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34731 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34733 \begin_inset space ~
34738 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34740 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34742 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34743 's main window, then only this selection
34744 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34745 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34746 the source view window.
34751 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34752 ; but note that if you have
34753 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34755 not just the one which is open at the time.
34758 \begin_layout Section
34759 Advanced Find and Replace
34760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34762 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34767 \begin_inset Index idx
34770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34777 \begin_inset Index idx
34780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34789 \begin_layout Subsection
34793 \begin_layout Standard
34794 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34795 allows for searching of complex,
34796 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34798 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34799 The key-features are:
34802 \begin_layout Itemize
34803 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34804 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34805 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34809 \begin_layout Itemize
34810 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34811 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34812 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34813 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34816 \begin_layout Itemize
34817 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34818 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34819 outside of mathematics environments
34822 \begin_layout Itemize
34823 Search may be widened to a specific
34828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34832 \begin_inset space ~
34835 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34836 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34843 \begin_layout Itemize
34844 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34845 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34850 \begin_inset space ~
34853 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34856 \begin_layout Subsection
34860 \begin_layout Standard
34861 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34863 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34876 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34879 ) or the toolbar button
34882 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34888 Advanced Find and Replace
34893 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34897 \begin_layout Standard
34903 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34907 \begin_inset space ~
34912 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34915 arg "paragraph-break"
34919 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34920 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34924 arg "paragraph-break"
34927 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34931 searches backwards.
34934 \begin_layout Standard
34938 \begin_inset space ~
34943 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34952 \begin_inset space ~
34957 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34961 Searching for mathematics
34964 \begin_layout Standard
34965 Mathematical formulas, such as
34966 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34969 or something more complex like
34970 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34973 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34978 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34979 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34980 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34981 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34987 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34991 \begin_layout Standard
34992 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34993 This is done by switching to the
34997 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35002 This way, entering in the
35009 \begin_layout Itemize
35010 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35011 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35014 \begin_layout Itemize
35015 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35016 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35019 \begin_layout Itemize
35020 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35021 of it only within section headings.
35022 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35023 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35027 \begin_layout Itemize
35028 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35029 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35036 \begin_layout Standard
35037 The entries made in the
35041 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35050 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35054 button or alternatively press
35057 arg "paragraph-break"
35064 while the cursor is in the
35067 \begin_inset space ~
35075 \begin_layout Standard
35076 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35078 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35082 \begin_layout Itemize
35083 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35084 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35092 with its typewriter version
35093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35107 \begin_layout Itemize
35108 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35114 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35126 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35133 (you may want to enable the
35136 \begin_inset space ~
35144 \begin_inset space ~
35149 options and disable the
35157 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35165 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35166 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35170 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35173 , or occurrences of
35174 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35178 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35184 \begin_layout Subsection
35188 \begin_layout Standard
35189 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35194 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35196 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35198 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35208 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35214 This is done with the context menu
35216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35217 Insert Regular Expression
35219 while the cursor is in the
35224 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35225 expression matching rules
35229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35230 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35237 \begin_inset space ~
35240 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35241 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35247 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35248 same text in the document.
35249 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35250 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35253 \begin_layout Enumerate
35254 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35259 editor the fraction
35260 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35264 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35267 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35268 fractions with the given denominator.
35271 \begin_layout Enumerate
35272 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35284 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35289 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35290 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35291 Also, by inserting a
35292 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35295 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35296 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35299 \begin_layout Standard
35300 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35301 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35302 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35305 , and referring back to them through
35306 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35310 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35314 For example, try searching with the regexp
35315 \begin_inset Newline newline
35318 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35321 \begin_inset Newline newline
35324 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35327 \begin_layout Standard
35328 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35331 \begin_layout Standard
35332 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35340 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35341 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35342 sub-expressions is absolute.
35344 \begin_inset space ~
35348 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35351 always refers to the first occurrence of
35352 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35355 in all entered regexps.
35363 \begin_layout Section
35365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35367 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35372 \begin_inset Index idx
35375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35384 \begin_layout Standard
35386 has a built-in spell checker.
35389 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35396 key or the toolbar button
35399 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35402 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35403 beginning of the currently selected text.
35404 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35405 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35406 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35407 scrolled so that it is visible.
35408 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35409 n, if any could be found.
35410 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35414 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35415 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35418 \begin_layout Standard
35419 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35422 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35426 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35427 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35429 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35430 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35433 \begin_inset space ~
35441 arg "dialog-show character"
35444 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35446 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35449 \begin_layout Standard
35450 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35451 can be downloaded from here:
35452 \begin_inset Newline newline
35456 \begin_inset Flex URL
35459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35461 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35467 \begin_inset Newline newline
35471 \begin_inset space ~
35474 files for each language.
35475 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35476 \begin_inset space ~
35479 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35480 's installation subfolder
35488 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35490 \begin_inset Newline newline
35493 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35494 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35495 but in most cases these are
35511 is the language code.
35514 \begin_layout Subsection
35518 \begin_layout Standard
35521 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35522 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35524 \begin_inset space ~
35527 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35530 you can set the following things:
35533 \begin_layout Description
35535 \begin_inset space ~
35538 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35539 should use for spell checking.
35540 Depending on your platform,
35554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35555 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35556 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35571 \begin_inset space ~
35574 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35577 \begin_layout Description
35579 \begin_inset space ~
35582 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35583 will always use the given language
35584 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35587 \begin_layout Description
35589 \begin_inset space ~
35592 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35598 \begin_inset space \space{}
35602 This should normally not be needed.
35605 \begin_layout Description
35607 \begin_inset space ~
35611 \begin_inset space ~
35614 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35626 \begin_layout Description
35628 \begin_inset space ~
35631 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35632 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35633 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35634 appear in a context menu.
35635 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35639 \begin_layout Description
35641 \begin_inset space ~
35645 \begin_inset space ~
35649 \begin_inset space ~
35652 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35656 \begin_layout Section
35658 \begin_inset Index idx
35661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35670 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35677 \begin_layout Standard
35679 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35680 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35690 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35692 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35702 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35704 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35705 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35706 which are available for many languages.
35709 \begin_layout Standard
35710 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35711 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35715 \begin_layout Subsection
35716 Setting up the thesaurus
35719 \begin_layout Standard
35728 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35732 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35737 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35743 \begin_inset space ~
35751 For instance, the US English files are named:
35754 \begin_layout Itemize
35758 \begin_layout Itemize
35762 \begin_layout Standard
35771 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35772 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35775 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35776 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35777 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35779 \begin_inset space ~
35784 ) to the path where they are installed.
35788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35789 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35790 ies, typical locations are
35796 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35800 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35804 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35807 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35813 LibreOffice-<Version>
35820 On the Mac, the default location is
35822 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35823 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35824 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35825 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35826 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35827 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35835 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35836 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35837 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35841 \begin_layout Standard
35842 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35843 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35847 \begin_layout Itemize
35848 \begin_inset Flex URL
35851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35853 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35861 \begin_layout Standard
35862 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35863 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35865 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35866 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35867 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35874 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35876 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35877 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35881 \begin_layout Standard
35882 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35884 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35887 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35893 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35896 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35897 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35905 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35906 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35907 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35909 \begin_inset space ~
35914 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35917 \begin_layout Subsection
35918 Using the thesaurus
35921 \begin_layout Standard
35922 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35924 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35927 or the toolbar button
35930 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35933 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35935 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35937 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35938 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35939 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35948 ), related terms (such as
35951 \begin_inset space ~
35960 ), compounds (such as
35963 \begin_inset space ~
35972 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35981 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35984 \begin_layout Standard
35985 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35986 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35990 \begin_layout Standard
35991 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35992 the dictionary, such as the above
35996 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36001 \begin_inset space \space{}
36004 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36005 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36006 For example, looking up the word form
36010 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36015 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36020 \begin_inset space \space{}
36031 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36032 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36033 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36036 \begin_layout Section
36038 \begin_inset Index idx
36041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36048 \begin_inset Index idx
36051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36052 Document ! Change Tracking
36058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36060 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36067 \begin_layout Standard
36068 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36069 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36070 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36071 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36073 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36075 \begin_inset space ~
36078 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36080 \begin_inset space ~
36088 \begin_layout Standard
36089 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36103 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36104 You can change the color in
36106 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36107 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36113 \begin_inset space ~
36118 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36124 \begin_inset Index idx
36127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36128 Color ! Change tracking
36133 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36134 's status bar when the
36135 cursor is in changed text.
36136 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36139 arg "changes-merge"
36145 \begin_layout Standard
36146 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36148 \begin_inset Index idx
36151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36160 \begin_layout Standard
36161 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36167 \begin_layout Standard
36168 \begin_inset Graphics
36169 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36177 \begin_layout Standard
36178 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36184 \begin_layout Standard
36185 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36188 \begin_layout Standard
36189 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36195 \begin_layout Standard
36196 \begin_inset Tabular
36197 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36198 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36199 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36200 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36210 arg "changes-track"
36218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36224 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36229 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36231 \begin_inset space ~
36240 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36249 arg "changes-output"
36257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36263 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36268 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36270 \begin_inset space ~
36274 \begin_inset space ~
36278 \begin_inset space ~
36287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36308 Jumps to the next change
36314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36323 arg "change-accept"
36331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36337 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36339 \begin_inset space ~
36342 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36344 \begin_inset space ~
36353 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36362 arg "change-reject"
36370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36376 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36378 \begin_inset space ~
36381 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36383 \begin_inset space ~
36392 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36401 arg "changes-merge"
36409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36415 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36417 \begin_inset space ~
36420 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36422 \begin_inset space ~
36431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36440 arg "all-changes-accept"
36448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36454 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36456 \begin_inset space ~
36459 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36461 \begin_inset space ~
36465 \begin_inset space ~
36474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36483 arg "all-changes-reject"
36491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36497 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36499 \begin_inset space ~
36502 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36504 \begin_inset space ~
36508 \begin_inset space ~
36517 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36540 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36541 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36543 \begin_inset space ~
36552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36575 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36577 \begin_inset space ~
36593 \begin_layout Standard
36594 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36600 \begin_layout Standard
36601 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36621 \begin_layout Standard
36622 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36623 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36624 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36625 the next change after the current cursor position.
36626 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36627 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36628 step to the next change.
36629 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36632 \begin_layout Standard
36633 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36634 to describe a change.
36637 \begin_layout Standard
36638 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36644 \begin_inset Index idx
36647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36649 -packages ! dvipost
36655 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36657 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36664 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36668 \begin_layout Section
36669 Comparison of Documents
36670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36672 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36677 \begin_inset Index idx
36680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36681 Comparison of documents
36689 \begin_layout Standard
36690 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36693 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36697 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36698 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36700 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36702 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36706 \begin_inset space ~
36710 \begin_inset space ~
36714 \begin_inset space ~
36723 \begin_inset space ~
36727 \begin_inset space ~
36731 \begin_inset space ~
36735 \begin_inset space ~
36739 \begin_inset space ~
36743 \begin_inset space ~
36748 enables the change tracking option
36751 \begin_inset space ~
36755 \begin_inset space ~
36759 \begin_inset space ~
36764 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36767 \begin_layout Section
36768 International Support
36769 \begin_inset Index idx
36772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36773 International support
36781 \begin_layout Standard
36782 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36783 with any language you want.
36784 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36785 up \SpecialChar LyX
36787 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36789 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36797 \begin_layout Standard
36798 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36799 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36800 \begin_inset space ~
36804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36806 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36813 \begin_layout Subsection
36815 \begin_inset Index idx
36818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36825 \begin_inset Index idx
36828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36829 Document ! Settings
36835 \begin_inset Index idx
36838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36839 Document ! Language
36847 \begin_layout Standard
36850 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36851 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36854 dialog lets you set
36856 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36861 \begin_layout Standard
36866 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36871 \begin_inset space ~
36876 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36877 For details about the different encoding options see section
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36884 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36891 \begin_layout Subsection
36892 Keyboard mapping configuration
36893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36895 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36902 \begin_layout Standard
36903 If you have for example a U.
36904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36907 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36908 can use an alternate keymap.
36909 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36914 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36915 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36916 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36919 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36920 \begin_inset space ~
36924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36926 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36931 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36932 which one you want to use.
36935 \begin_layout Standard
36936 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36937 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36938 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36942 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36943 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36944 one to support the characters you want.
36945 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36952 \begin_layout Chapter
36955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36957 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36964 \begin_layout Standard
36965 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36966 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36967 topic inside the user's guide.
36970 \begin_layout Section
36972 \begin_inset Index idx
36975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36984 \begin_layout Standard
36989 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36992 \begin_layout Subsection
36996 \begin_layout Standard
36997 Creates a new document.
37000 \begin_layout Subsection
37004 \begin_layout Standard
37005 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37006 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37007 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37010 \begin_layout Subsection
37014 \begin_layout Standard
37018 \begin_layout Subsection
37022 \begin_layout Standard
37023 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37024 Click there on a file to open it.
37027 \begin_layout Subsection
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 Closes the current document.
37035 \begin_layout Subsection
37039 \begin_layout Standard
37040 Closes all opened documents.
37043 \begin_layout Subsection
37047 \begin_layout Standard
37048 Saves the actual document.
37051 \begin_layout Subsection
37055 \begin_layout Standard
37056 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37059 \begin_layout Subsection
37063 \begin_layout Standard
37064 Saves all opened documents.
37067 \begin_layout Subsection
37071 \begin_layout Standard
37072 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37075 \begin_layout Subsection
37079 \begin_layout Standard
37080 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37081 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37082 It is described in the section
37084 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37089 Additional Features
37094 \begin_layout Subsection
37098 \begin_layout Standard
37099 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37100 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37102 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37103 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37107 \begin_layout Standard
37108 When using the menu entry
37111 \begin_inset space ~
37116 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37120 \begin_inset space ~
37124 \begin_inset space ~
37128 \begin_inset space ~
37133 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37134 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37137 \begin_layout Subsection
37139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37141 name "subsec:Export"
37148 \begin_layout Standard
37149 You can export your document to various file formats.
37150 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37152 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37153 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37154 during its configuration.
37157 \begin_layout Standard
37158 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37160 \begin_inset space ~
37164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37166 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37173 \begin_layout Description
37179 \begin_inset space ~
37182 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37184 \begin_inset space ~
37187 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37188 \begin_inset Newline newline
37191 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37192 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37196 \begin_layout Description
37197 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37203 \begin_layout Description
37205 \begin_inset space ~
37208 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37214 \begin_layout Description
37215 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37216 's native DVI-format.
37217 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37218 files paths or file names in your document.
37220 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37227 \begin_layout Description
37228 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37229 in files paths or file names
37232 \begin_layout Description
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37241 ) DVI-format using the program
37243 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37246 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37250 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37258 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37266 \begin_layout Description
37268 \begin_inset space ~
37271 (cropped) the same as
37275 but with cropped page margins.
37278 \begin_layout Description
37280 \begin_inset space ~
37283 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37287 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37292 \begin_layout Description
37296 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37304 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37312 \begin_layout Description
37314 \begin_inset space ~
37318 \begin_inset space ~
37321 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37325 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37333 \begin_layout Description
37337 \begin_inset space ~
37346 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37347 source that is compilable with the program
37349 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37353 \begin_layout Description
37357 \begin_inset space ~
37362 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37363 source, additionally all images used in the document
37364 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37368 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37371 \begin_layout Description
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37380 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37381 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37382 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37390 \begin_layout Description
37394 \begin_inset space ~
37403 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37404 source that is compilable with the program
37410 \begin_layout Description
37412 \begin_inset space ~
37416 \begin_inset space ~
37423 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37424 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37430 \begin_layout Description
37432 \begin_inset space ~
37435 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37436 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37442 \begin_inset space \space{}
37447 \begin_inset space ~
37451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37466 represent the version number)
37469 \begin_layout Description
37471 \begin_inset space ~
37475 \begin_inset space ~
37478 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37479 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37480 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37484 \begin_layout Description
37485 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37486 's internal XHTML engine
37489 \begin_layout Description
37491 \begin_inset space ~
37495 \begin_inset space ~
37499 \begin_inset space ~
37503 \begin_inset space ~
37506 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37511 For the conversion the program
37520 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37523 \begin_layout Description
37524 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37529 \begin_layout Description
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37534 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37536 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37539 For the conversion the program
37548 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37551 \begin_layout Description
37553 \begin_inset space ~
37556 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37557 For the conversion the program
37566 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37569 \begin_layout Description
37571 \begin_inset space ~
37574 (cropped) the same as
37577 \begin_inset space ~
37582 but with cropped page margins
37585 \begin_layout Description
37589 \begin_inset space ~
37594 PDF-format using the program
37598 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37601 \begin_layout Description
37605 \begin_inset space ~
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37617 \begin_inset space ~
37622 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37627 \begin_inset space \space{}
37630 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37634 \begin_layout Description
37638 \begin_inset space ~
37643 PDF-format using the program
37645 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37648 , produces PDF-files directly
37651 \begin_layout Description
37655 \begin_inset space ~
37660 PDF-format using the program
37664 , produces PDF-files directly
37667 \begin_layout Description
37671 \begin_inset space ~
37676 PDF-format using the program
37680 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37683 \begin_layout Description
37687 \begin_inset space ~
37692 PDF-format using the program
37697 , produces PDF-files directly
37700 \begin_layout Description
37704 \begin_inset space ~
37712 \begin_layout Description
37716 \begin_inset space ~
37720 \begin_inset space ~
37725 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37726 and then exported as text using the program
37731 \begin_layout Description
37736 PostScript format using the program
37744 options see section
37745 \begin_inset space ~
37749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37751 reference "subsec:General-output"
37758 \begin_layout Description
37759 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37760 source and also code in the statistical programming
37774 it is possible to use
37778 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37782 \begin_layout Standard
37783 If one of the menu entries
37790 \begin_inset space ~
37799 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37801 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37803 \begin_inset space ~
37807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37809 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37814 \begin_inset Index idx
37817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37818 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37827 \begin_layout Subsection
37831 \begin_layout Standard
37832 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37833 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37836 \begin_inset space ~
37840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37842 reference "sec:Paths"
37847 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37856 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37857 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37858 's preferences as described in section
37859 \begin_inset space ~
37863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37865 reference "subsec:Converters"
37872 \begin_layout Subsection
37873 New and Close Window
37876 \begin_layout Standard
37877 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37881 \begin_layout Subsection
37885 \begin_layout Standard
37886 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37889 \begin_layout Section
37891 \begin_inset Index idx
37894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37903 \begin_layout Subsection
37907 \begin_layout Standard
37908 Described in section
37909 \begin_inset space ~
37913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37915 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37922 \begin_layout Subsection
37923 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37926 \begin_layout Standard
37927 Described in section
37928 \begin_inset space ~
37932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37934 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37941 \begin_layout Subsection
37945 \begin_layout Standard
37946 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37947 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37950 \begin_layout Subsection
37954 \begin_layout Standard
37955 Selects the whole document.
37958 \begin_layout Subsection
37959 Find & Replace (Quick)
37962 \begin_layout Standard
37963 Described in section
37964 \begin_inset space ~
37968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37970 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37977 \begin_layout Subsection
37978 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37981 \begin_layout Standard
37982 Described in section
37983 \begin_inset space ~
37987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37989 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37996 \begin_layout Subsection
37997 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38000 \begin_layout Standard
38001 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38005 \begin_layout Subsection
38009 \begin_layout Standard
38010 Described in section
38011 \begin_inset space ~
38015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38017 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38024 \begin_layout Subsection
38026 \begin_inset Index idx
38029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38030 Paragraph ! Settings
38038 \begin_layout Standard
38039 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38040 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38045 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38046 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38053 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38055 \begin_inset space ~
38063 \begin_layout Subsection
38064 Table and Rows & Columns
38067 \begin_layout Standard
38068 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38069 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38070 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38073 \begin_layout Subsection
38077 \begin_layout Standard
38078 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38079 It will dissolve this inset.
38080 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38084 \begin_layout Subsection
38088 \begin_layout Standard
38089 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38090 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38093 \begin_layout Subsection
38094 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38097 \begin_layout Standard
38098 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38100 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38101 \begin_inset space ~
38105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38107 reference "sec:Nesting"
38112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38114 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38121 \begin_layout Subsection
38124 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38127 \begin_layout Standard
38128 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38129 nts of the same type.
38131 \begin_inset space ~
38135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38137 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38141 for an explanation.
38144 \begin_layout Section
38146 \begin_inset Index idx
38149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38158 \begin_layout Standard
38159 At the bottom of the
38163 menu the opened documents are listed.
38166 \begin_layout Subsection
38167 Open/Close all Insets
38170 \begin_layout Standard
38171 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38174 \begin_layout Subsection
38175 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38178 \begin_layout Standard
38179 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38182 \begin_layout Standard
38183 Math macros are described in the
38190 \begin_layout Subsection
38194 \begin_layout Standard
38195 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38196 \begin_inset space ~
38200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38202 reference "sec:Navigating"
38207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38209 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38216 \begin_layout Subsection
38220 \begin_layout Standard
38221 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38223 \begin_inset space ~
38227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38229 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38236 \begin_layout Subsection
38240 \begin_layout Standard
38241 Opens a window showing console messages.
38242 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38247 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38248 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38249 is processing the document.
38252 \begin_layout Subsection
38254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38256 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38261 \begin_inset Index idx
38264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38273 \begin_layout Standard
38274 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38275 All toolbars and the
38278 \begin_inset space ~
38283 can be turned on and off.
38288 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38300 \begin_inset space ~
38312 \begin_inset space ~
38317 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38321 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38328 \begin_layout Standard
38333 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38337 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38338 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38339 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38340 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38341 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38344 \begin_layout Standard
38346 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38347 \begin_inset space ~
38351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38353 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38360 \begin_layout Subsection
38364 \begin_layout Standard
38368 \begin_inset space ~
38372 \begin_inset space ~
38376 \begin_inset space ~
38380 \begin_inset space ~
38384 \begin_inset space ~
38388 \begin_inset space ~
38393 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38394 's main window vertically while
38397 \begin_inset space ~
38401 \begin_inset space ~
38405 \begin_inset space ~
38409 \begin_inset space ~
38413 \begin_inset space ~
38417 \begin_inset space ~
38422 will split it horizontally.
38423 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38424 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38425 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38426 three or more documents at the same time.
38427 To close a split view, use the menu
38430 \begin_inset space ~
38434 \begin_inset space ~
38442 \begin_layout Subsection
38446 \begin_layout Standard
38447 Closes a split view.
38450 \begin_layout Subsection
38454 \begin_layout Standard
38455 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38456 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38457 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38458 's main window fullscreen.
38459 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38460 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38463 \begin_layout Section
38465 \begin_inset Index idx
38468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38477 \begin_layout Subsection
38481 \begin_layout Standard
38482 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38483 \begin_inset space ~
38487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38489 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38500 \begin_layout Subsection
38502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38504 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38511 \begin_layout Standard
38512 Here you can insert the following characters:
38515 \begin_layout Description
38520 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38523 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38524 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38525 -packages you have installed.
38526 You can get a complete display by checking
38529 \begin_inset space ~
38535 \begin_inset Newline newline
38539 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38547 Not all characters will be visible in the
38551 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38552 dialog (see section
38553 \begin_inset space ~
38557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38559 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38563 ) can display every character.
38571 \begin_layout Description
38572 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38576 \begin_layout Description
38578 \begin_inset space ~
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38585 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38586 \begin_inset space ~
38590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38592 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38599 \begin_layout Description
38601 \begin_inset space ~
38604 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38608 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38614 \begin_layout Description
38616 \begin_inset space ~
38619 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38622 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38623 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38629 \begin_layout Description
38631 \begin_inset space ~
38634 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38638 \begin_layout Description
38640 \begin_inset space ~
38643 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38647 \begin_layout Description
38649 \begin_inset space ~
38652 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38658 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38664 \begin_layout Description
38666 \begin_inset space ~
38669 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38673 \begin_layout Description
38675 \begin_inset space ~
38679 \begin_inset Index idx
38682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38689 \begin_inset Index idx
38692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38693 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38698 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38699 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38701 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38707 \begin_inset Index idx
38710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 \begin_inset Newline newline
38721 More information about this feature can be found in the
38727 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38733 \begin_layout Description
38734 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38736 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38737 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38741 \begin_layout Subsection
38745 \begin_layout Standard
38746 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38749 \begin_layout Description
38750 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38751 \begin_inset script superscript
38753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38762 \begin_layout Description
38763 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38764 \begin_inset script subscript
38766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38775 \begin_layout Description
38777 \begin_inset space ~
38780 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38781 \begin_inset space ~
38785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38787 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38794 \begin_layout Description
38796 \begin_inset space ~
38799 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38800 \begin_inset space ~
38804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38806 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38813 \begin_layout Description
38815 \begin_inset space ~
38818 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38819 \begin_inset space ~
38823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38825 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38832 \begin_layout Description
38834 \begin_inset space ~
38837 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38843 \begin_inset space \space{}
38846 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38847 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38856 To insert a fraction use the command
38861 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38865 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38874 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38881 \begin_layout Description
38883 \begin_inset space ~
38886 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38887 \begin_inset space ~
38891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38893 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38900 \begin_layout Description
38902 \begin_inset space ~
38905 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38912 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38919 \begin_layout Description
38921 \begin_inset space ~
38924 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38925 \begin_inset space ~
38929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38931 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38938 \begin_layout Description
38939 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38940 \begin_inset space ~
38944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38946 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38953 \begin_layout Description
38955 \begin_inset space ~
38958 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38959 \begin_inset space ~
38963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38965 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38972 \begin_layout Description
38974 \begin_inset space ~
38977 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38978 \begin_inset space ~
38982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38984 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38991 \begin_layout Description
38993 \begin_inset space ~
38997 \begin_inset space ~
39000 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39001 \begin_inset space ~
39005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39007 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39014 \begin_layout Description
39016 \begin_inset space ~
39019 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39020 as described in section
39021 \begin_inset space ~
39025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39027 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39034 \begin_layout Description
39036 \begin_inset space ~
39039 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39040 \begin_inset space ~
39044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39046 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39053 \begin_layout Description
39055 \begin_inset space ~
39058 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39059 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39061 \begin_inset space ~
39065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39067 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39074 \begin_layout Description
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39079 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39086 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39093 \begin_layout Description
39095 \begin_inset space ~
39099 \begin_inset space ~
39102 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39103 \begin_inset space ~
39107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39109 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39116 \begin_layout Subsection
39120 \begin_layout Standard
39121 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39125 \begin_inset space ~
39146 are described in section
39147 \begin_inset space ~
39151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39153 reference "sec:toc"
39162 is described in section
39163 \begin_inset space ~
39167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39169 reference "sec:Index"
39177 is described in section
39178 \begin_inset space ~
39182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39184 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39190 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39193 is described in section
39194 \begin_inset space ~
39198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39200 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39207 \begin_layout Subsection
39211 \begin_layout Standard
39212 To insert floats, as described in section
39213 \begin_inset space ~
39217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39219 reference "sec:Floats"
39223 and in detail the chapter
39230 \begin_inset space ~
39238 \begin_layout Subsection
39242 \begin_layout Standard
39243 To insert notes, described in section
39244 \begin_inset space ~
39248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39250 reference "sec:Notes"
39257 \begin_layout Subsection
39261 \begin_layout Standard
39262 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39264 Branches are described in section
39265 \begin_inset space ~
39269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39271 reference "sec:Branches"
39278 \begin_layout Subsection
39282 \begin_layout Standard
39283 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39284 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39286 An example is the document class
39287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39294 with three custom insets.
39297 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39301 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39307 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39310 \begin_layout Subsection
39312 \begin_inset Index idx
39315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39324 \begin_layout Standard
39325 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39327 For more information see chapter
39329 External Document Parts
39332 \begin_inset space ~
39338 \begin_layout Subsection
39340 \begin_inset Index idx
39343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39352 \begin_layout Standard
39353 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39354 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39361 \begin_inset space ~
39369 \begin_layout Subsection
39373 \begin_layout Standard
39378 dialog as described in section
39379 \begin_inset space ~
39383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39385 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39392 \begin_layout Subsection
39396 \begin_layout Standard
39401 as described in section
39402 \begin_inset space ~
39406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39408 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39415 \begin_layout Subsection
39419 \begin_layout Standard
39424 as described in section
39425 \begin_inset space ~
39429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39431 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39438 \begin_layout Subsection
39440 \begin_inset Index idx
39443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39450 \begin_inset Index idx
39453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39454 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39462 \begin_layout Standard
39463 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39464 Floats are described in section
39465 \begin_inset space ~
39469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39471 reference "sec:Floats"
39475 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39477 Multi-page Captions
39482 \begin_inset space ~
39490 \begin_layout Subsection
39494 \begin_layout Standard
39495 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39496 \begin_inset space ~
39500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39502 reference "sec:Index"
39509 \begin_layout Subsection
39513 \begin_layout Standard
39514 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39515 \begin_inset space ~
39519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39521 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39528 \begin_layout Subsection
39532 \begin_layout Standard
39533 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39534 Tables are described in section
39535 \begin_inset space ~
39539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39541 reference "sec:Tables"
39545 and in detail in the chapter
39552 \begin_inset space ~
39560 \begin_layout Subsection
39564 \begin_layout Standard
39570 Graphics are described in section
39571 \begin_inset space ~
39575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39577 reference "sec:Graphics"
39584 \begin_layout Subsection
39588 \begin_layout Standard
39589 Inserts a URL as described in section
39590 \begin_inset space ~
39594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39596 reference "subsec:URLs"
39603 \begin_layout Subsection
39607 \begin_layout Standard
39608 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39609 \begin_inset space ~
39613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39615 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39622 \begin_layout Subsection
39626 \begin_layout Standard
39627 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39628 \begin_inset space ~
39632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39634 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39641 \begin_layout Subsection
39645 \begin_layout Standard
39646 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39647 \begin_inset space ~
39651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39653 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39660 \begin_layout Subsection
39664 \begin_layout Standard
39665 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39666 title or caption of a float.
39667 Inserts a short title as described in section
39668 \begin_inset space ~
39672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39674 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39681 \begin_layout Subsection
39686 \begin_layout Standard
39687 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39688 Code box as described in section
39689 \begin_inset space ~
39693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39695 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39702 \begin_layout Subsection
39704 \begin_inset Index idx
39707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39716 \begin_layout Standard
39717 Inserts a program listings box.
39718 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39720 Program Code Listings
39725 \begin_inset space ~
39733 \begin_layout Subsection
39737 \begin_layout Standard
39738 Inserts the actual date.
39739 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39743 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39751 \begin_inset space ~
39759 \begin_layout Subsection
39763 \begin_layout Standard
39764 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39771 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39778 \begin_layout Section
39780 \begin_inset Index idx
39783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39792 \begin_layout Standard
39793 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39794 \begin_inset space ~
39797 of the current document.
39798 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39801 \begin_layout Subsection
39805 \begin_layout Standard
39806 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39807 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39808 to jump, for example, between section
39809 \begin_inset space ~
39813 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39814 \begin_inset space ~
39817 2.5 and use the submenu
39820 \begin_inset space ~
39824 \begin_inset space ~
39831 \begin_inset space ~
39837 \begin_inset space ~
39841 \begin_inset space ~
39847 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39851 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39857 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39860 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39863 \begin_layout Standard
39864 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39868 \begin_inset space ~
39873 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39876 \begin_inset space ~
39881 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39884 \begin_layout Subsection
39885 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39888 \begin_layout Standard
39889 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39893 \begin_layout Subsection
39897 \begin_layout Standard
39898 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39899 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39900 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39904 \begin_inset space ~
39908 \begin_inset space ~
39916 \begin_layout Subsection
39920 \begin_layout Standard
39921 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39924 The \SpecialChar LyX
39925 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39927 \begin_inset space ~
39935 \begin_inset space ~
39940 manual for a detailed description.
39943 \begin_layout Section
39945 \begin_inset Index idx
39948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39957 \begin_layout Subsection
39961 \begin_layout Standard
39962 Change Tracking is described in section
39963 \begin_inset space ~
39967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39969 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39976 \begin_layout Subsection
39984 \begin_layout Standard
39985 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39986 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39987 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39989 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39990 to the clipboard or update the view.
39991 \begin_inset Newline newline
39994 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39998 \begin_layout Standard
40001 Open Containing Directory
40003 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40004 's temporary folder for the document.
40005 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40006 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40007 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40008 For example some journals require to send the
40012 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40016 \begin_layout Subsection
40017 Start Appendix Here
40020 \begin_layout Standard
40021 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40022 as described in section
40023 \begin_inset space ~
40027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40029 reference "sec:Appendices"
40036 \begin_layout Subsection
40038 \begin_inset space ~
40044 \begin_layout Standard
40045 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40046 default output format for the document (menu
40048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40049 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40050 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40052 \begin_inset space ~
40056 \begin_inset space ~
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40068 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40072 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40075 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40076 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40081 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40083 \begin_inset space ~
40086 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40088 \begin_inset space ~
40092 \begin_inset space ~
40098 \begin_inset space ~
40102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40104 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40108 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40109 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40111 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40112 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40114 \begin_inset space ~
40117 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40119 \begin_inset space ~
40122 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40132 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40137 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40138 when it is first configured.
40139 The default output format is
40142 \begin_inset space ~
40150 \begin_layout Subsection
40151 View (Other Formats)
40154 \begin_layout Standard
40155 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40156 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40157 actual document with an external program.
40158 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40159 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40160 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40162 All possible formats are listed in section
40163 \begin_inset space ~
40167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40169 reference "subsec:Export"
40174 You should at least see the menu entry
40179 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40181 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40183 \begin_inset space ~
40187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40189 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40194 \begin_inset Index idx
40197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40198 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40207 \begin_layout Standard
40208 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40209 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40211 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40212 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40214 \begin_inset space ~
40217 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40219 \begin_inset space ~
40222 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40232 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40237 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40238 when it is first configured.
40241 \begin_layout Subsection
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40249 \begin_layout Standard
40250 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40251 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40254 \begin_layout Subsection
40255 Update (Other Formats)
40258 \begin_layout Standard
40259 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40260 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40263 \begin_layout Subsection
40264 View Master Document
40267 \begin_layout Standard
40268 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40284 \begin_inset space ~
40289 manual for more information on this topic).
40290 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40291 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40295 \begin_inset space ~
40299 \begin_inset space ~
40304 generates the output of the whole book, while
40308 will just output the chapter alone.
40311 \begin_layout Standard
40312 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40313 in the document settings (menu
40315 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40316 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40317 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40319 \begin_inset space ~
40323 \begin_inset space ~
40329 \begin_inset space ~
40333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40335 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40339 ) or in the preferences (menu
40341 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40342 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40347 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40352 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40354 \begin_inset space ~
40358 \begin_inset space ~
40364 \begin_inset space ~
40368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40370 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40377 \begin_layout Subsection
40378 Update Master Document
40381 \begin_layout Standard
40382 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40398 \begin_inset space ~
40403 manual for more information on this topic).
40404 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40405 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40408 \begin_layout Standard
40409 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40410 in the document settings (menu
40412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40413 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40414 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40416 \begin_inset space ~
40420 \begin_inset space ~
40426 \begin_inset space ~
40430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40432 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40436 ) or in the preferences (menu
40438 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40439 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40441 \begin_inset space ~
40444 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40446 \begin_inset space ~
40449 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40451 \begin_inset space ~
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40461 \begin_inset space ~
40465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40467 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40474 \begin_layout Subsection
40476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40478 name "subsec:Compressed"
40485 \begin_layout Standard
40486 Un/compresses the current document.
40487 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40488 compression (see the
40490 Additional Features
40492 manual for details).
40495 \begin_layout Subsection
40499 \begin_layout Standard
40500 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40503 \begin_layout Subsection
40507 \begin_layout Standard
40508 The document settings are described in appendix
40509 \begin_inset space ~
40513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40515 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40522 \begin_layout Section
40524 \begin_inset Index idx
40527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40536 \begin_layout Subsection
40540 \begin_layout Standard
40541 Spell checking is explained in section
40542 \begin_inset space ~
40546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40548 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40555 \begin_layout Subsection
40559 \begin_layout Standard
40560 The thesaurus is described in section
40561 \begin_inset space ~
40565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40567 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40574 \begin_layout Subsection
40576 \begin_inset Index idx
40579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40586 \begin_inset Index idx
40589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40598 \begin_layout Standard
40599 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40600 the highlighted document part.
40603 \begin_layout Subsection
40609 \begin_inset Index idx
40612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40613 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40622 \begin_layout Standard
40623 Generates with the help of the program
40625 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40628 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40629 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40630 This feature is not available on Windows.
40633 \begin_layout Subsection
40639 \begin_inset Index idx
40642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40652 \begin_layout Standard
40653 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40658 \begin_inset space ~
40663 to see the full filename paths.
40666 \begin_layout Subsection
40668 \begin_inset Index idx
40671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40680 \begin_layout Standard
40681 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40682 files as described in section
40683 \begin_inset space ~
40687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40689 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40696 \begin_layout Subsection
40698 \begin_inset Index idx
40701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40714 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40732 \begin_inset Index idx
40735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40736 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40745 \begin_layout Standard
40746 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40747 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40748 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40749 -packages and programs it needs; see
40751 \begin_inset space ~
40755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40757 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40764 \begin_layout Subsection
40768 \begin_layout Standard
40773 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40774 \begin_inset space ~
40778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40780 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40787 \begin_layout Section
40789 \begin_inset Index idx
40792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40801 \begin_layout Standard
40802 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40803 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40805 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40809 \begin_layout Standard
40813 \begin_inset space ~
40818 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40819 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40820 packages and classes found
40821 by \SpecialChar LyX
40823 \begin_inset space ~
40827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40829 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40836 \begin_layout Standard
40840 \begin_inset space ~
40845 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40850 \begin_layout Section
40852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40854 name "sec:Toolbars"
40861 \begin_layout Standard
40862 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40869 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40876 \begin_layout Standard
40877 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40878 This is described in the
40880 Additional Features
40885 \begin_layout Subsection
40887 \begin_inset Index idx
40890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40899 \begin_layout Standard
40900 \begin_inset Graphics
40901 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40909 \begin_layout Standard
40910 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40916 \begin_layout Standard
40917 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40934 \begin_inset Note Note
40937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40938 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40943 manual for more information.
40951 \begin_layout Standard
40952 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40958 \begin_layout Standard
40959 \begin_inset Tabular
40960 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40961 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40962 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40963 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40969 \begin_inset Graphics
40970 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40984 pull-down box for the environments
40997 \begin_layout Standard
40998 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41004 \begin_layout Standard
41006 \begin_inset Tabular
41007 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41008 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41009 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41010 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41011 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41034 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41041 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41064 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41094 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41110 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41124 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41140 arg "spelling-continuously"
41148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41152 Spellcheck continuously
41158 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41181 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41188 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41211 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41218 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41271 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41301 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41317 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41331 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41357 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41371 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41399 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41413 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41414 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41442 Emphasize text, function of the
41444 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41446 \begin_inset space ~
41449 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41479 Set text to noun style, function of the
41481 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41483 \begin_inset space ~
41486 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41495 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41504 arg "textstyle-apply"
41512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41516 Format text using the current settings in the
41518 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41523 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41555 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41556 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41558 \begin_inset space ~
41567 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41576 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41597 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41604 arg "tabular-insert"
41612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41625 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41634 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41646 Toggle outline window on/off,
41648 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41655 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41664 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41676 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41691 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41703 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41716 \begin_layout Subsection
41718 \begin_inset Index idx
41721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41730 \begin_layout Standard
41731 \begin_inset Graphics
41732 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41740 \begin_layout Standard
41741 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41747 \begin_layout Standard
41748 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41752 \begin_layout Standard
41753 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41759 \begin_layout Standard
41760 \begin_inset Tabular
41761 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41762 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41763 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41764 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41801 arg "layout Enumerate"
41809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41819 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41828 arg "layout Itemize"
41836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41846 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41882 arg "layout Description"
41890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41900 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41909 arg "depth-increment"
41917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41923 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41925 \begin_inset space ~
41929 \begin_inset space ~
41938 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41947 arg "depth-decrement"
41955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41961 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41967 \begin_inset space ~
41976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41985 arg "float-insert figure"
41993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41999 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42000 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42016 arg "float-insert table"
42024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42030 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42031 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42077 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42098 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42107 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42151 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42171 arg "nomencl-insert"
42179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42205 arg "footnote-insert"
42213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42235 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42251 \begin_inset space ~
42260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42284 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42286 \begin_inset space ~
42295 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42304 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42325 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42380 \begin_inset space ~
42389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42398 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42412 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42413 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42429 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42443 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42444 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42446 \begin_inset space ~
42455 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42464 arg "dialog-show character"
42472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42478 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42483 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42490 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42499 arg "layout-paragraph"
42507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42513 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42515 \begin_inset space ~
42524 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42533 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42547 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42561 \begin_layout Subsection
42562 View/Update Toolbar
42563 \begin_inset Index idx
42566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42567 Toolbar ! View / Update
42575 \begin_layout Standard
42576 \begin_inset Graphics
42577 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42584 \begin_layout Standard
42585 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42591 \begin_layout Standard
42592 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42596 \begin_layout Standard
42597 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42603 \begin_layout Standard
42604 \begin_inset Tabular
42605 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42606 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42607 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42608 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42632 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42648 arg "buffer-update"
42656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42669 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42678 arg "master-buffer-view"
42686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42692 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42694 \begin_inset space ~
42703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42712 arg "master-buffer-update"
42720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42726 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42728 \begin_inset space ~
42732 \begin_inset space ~
42741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42750 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42764 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42765 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42766 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42767 Synchronize with Output
42773 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42797 View (Other Formats)
42803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42810 arg "update-others"
42818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42824 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42825 Update (Other Formats)
42838 \begin_layout Standard
42839 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42843 \begin_layout Subsection
42847 \begin_layout Standard
42848 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42849 \begin_inset space ~
42853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42855 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42859 , the table toolbar
42860 \begin_inset Index idx
42863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42872 \begin_inset space ~
42877 manual and the math macro toolbar
42878 \begin_inset Index idx
42881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42894 \begin_layout Chapter
42895 The Document Settings
42896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42898 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42903 \begin_inset Index idx
42906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42907 Document ! Settings
42915 \begin_layout Standard
42919 \begin_inset space ~
42924 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42925 is called with the menu
42927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42931 You can save your document settings as default with the
42933 Save as Document Defaults
42935 button in any dialog.
42936 This will create a template named
42940 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42941 when you create a new document without
42945 \begin_layout Standard
42950 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42951 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42954 \begin_layout Standard
42955 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42956 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42957 to find the one you are looking for.
42958 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42959 the submenus of the dialog.
42961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42965 \begin_inset space \space{}
42969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42976 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42977 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42978 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42981 \begin_layout Section
42985 \begin_layout Standard
42986 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42988 Document classes are described in section
42989 \begin_inset space ~
42993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42995 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43003 \begin_layout Standard
43007 \begin_inset space ~
43012 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43017 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43018 as a layout for a document class.
43019 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43021 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43030 \begin_layout Standard
43031 Some classes use special class options by default.
43032 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43036 and you can decide to use them or not.
43037 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43038 recommended you leave them untouched.
43043 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43044 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43049 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43051 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43057 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43058 \begin_inset Newline newline
43063 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43066 \begin_inset Newline newline
43069 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43070 distribution, see section
43075 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43077 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43090 \begin_layout Standard
43095 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43096 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43097 in the background if the child document
43098 is opened without its master.
43099 This way child documents are always compilable.
43100 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43107 \begin_inset space ~
43115 \begin_layout Standard
43116 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43127 \begin_inset Index idx
43130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43132 -packages ! prettyref
43138 \begin_inset Index idx
43141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43143 -packages ! refstyle
43148 for cross-references, see section
43149 \begin_inset space ~
43153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43155 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43162 \begin_layout Section
43166 \begin_layout Standard
43167 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43168 Please refer to the section
43171 \begin_inset space ~
43179 \begin_inset space ~
43184 manual for details.
43187 \begin_layout Section
43191 \begin_layout Standard
43192 Modules are explained in section
43193 \begin_inset space ~
43197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43199 reference "subsec:Modules"
43206 \begin_layout Section
43210 \begin_layout Standard
43212 \begin_inset space ~
43216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43218 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43225 \begin_layout Section
43229 \begin_layout Standard
43230 The document font settings are described in section
43231 \begin_inset space ~
43235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43237 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43244 \begin_layout Section
43248 \begin_layout Standard
43249 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43261 \begin_inset space ~
43266 and whether it should be a
43269 \begin_inset space ~
43274 can also be specified here.
43277 \begin_layout Standard
43278 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43279 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43280 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43282 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43285 \begin_layout Standard
43288 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43291 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43292 justifies the text on screen.
43293 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43297 \begin_layout Section
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43302 This dialog is described in sections
43303 \begin_inset space ~
43307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43309 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43316 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43323 \begin_layout Section
43327 \begin_layout Standard
43328 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43329 \begin_inset space ~
43333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43335 reference "subsec:Margins"
43342 \begin_layout Section
43344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43346 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43351 \begin_inset Index idx
43354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43355 Language ! Encoding
43363 \begin_layout Standard
43364 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43365 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43366 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43368 is always encoded in utf8).
43369 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43370 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43371 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43372 -command is not known for
43373 a particular character).
43376 \begin_layout Standard
43377 If you use the option
43382 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43383 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43384 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43386 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43387 exactly one encoding.
43388 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43391 \begin_layout Standard
43393 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43394 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43395 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43396 installation supports Unicode), choose
43397 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43398 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43399 is quite incomplete, so
43400 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43405 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43406 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43407 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43408 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43409 -commands is not used, because all
43410 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43411 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43412 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43413 , two new alternative engines
43414 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43416 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43418 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43421 \begin_inset space ~
43429 \begin_inset space ~
43437 \begin_inset space ~
43443 \begin_inset space ~
43447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43449 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43454 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43458 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43461 \begin_layout Standard
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43470 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43471 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43481 The possible settings are:
43484 \begin_layout Description
43485 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43487 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43488 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43492 \begin_inset space ~
43496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43498 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43505 \begin_layout Description
43506 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43507 format you will use.
43508 In many cases this will be
43513 \begin_inset Index idx
43516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43524 If the newer package
43529 \begin_inset Index idx
43532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43534 -packages ! polyglossia
43539 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43540 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43541 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43543 this package will be used instead of
43550 \begin_layout Description
43552 \begin_inset space ~
43563 would be more appropriate.
43566 \begin_layout Description
43567 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43568 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43572 (for German texts), type in
43575 \begin_inset Newline newline
43580 usepackage{ngerman}
43583 \begin_layout Description
43584 None will not use a language package.
43585 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43588 \begin_layout Standard
43589 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43592 \begin_layout Description
43594 \begin_inset space ~
43598 \begin_inset space ~
43602 \begin_inset space ~
43609 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43615 \begin_inset Index idx
43618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43620 -packages ! inputenc
43626 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43627 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43628 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43632 \begin_layout Description
43633 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43635 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43636 commands, which may result in a big
43637 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43638 -commands are needed.
43641 \begin_layout Description
43643 \begin_inset space ~
43647 \begin_inset space ~
43650 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43653 \begin_layout Description
43655 \begin_inset space ~
43659 \begin_inset space ~
43662 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43665 \begin_layout Description
43667 \begin_inset space ~
43670 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43673 \begin_layout Description
43675 \begin_inset space ~
43679 \begin_inset space ~
43682 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43683 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43686 \begin_layout Description
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43692 \begin_inset space ~
43695 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43699 \begin_layout Description
43701 \begin_inset space ~
43705 \begin_inset space ~
43708 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43709 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43712 \begin_layout Description
43714 \begin_inset space ~
43718 \begin_inset space ~
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43725 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43726 \begin_inset space ~
43732 \begin_layout Description
43734 \begin_inset space ~
43738 \begin_inset space ~
43742 \begin_inset space ~
43745 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43746 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43749 \begin_layout Description
43751 \begin_inset space ~
43755 \begin_inset space ~
43758 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43759 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43760 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43761 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43762 \begin_inset space ~
43766 \begin_inset space ~
43772 \begin_layout Description
43774 \begin_inset space ~
43778 \begin_inset space ~
43781 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43782 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43783 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43785 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43786 \begin_inset space ~
43790 \begin_inset space ~
43796 \begin_layout Description
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43802 \begin_inset space ~
43805 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43808 \begin_layout Description
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43814 \begin_inset space ~
43817 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43820 \begin_layout Description
43822 \begin_inset space ~
43826 \begin_inset space ~
43829 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43832 \begin_layout Description
43834 \begin_inset space ~
43837 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43840 \begin_layout Description
43842 \begin_inset space ~
43845 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43848 \begin_layout Description
43850 \begin_inset space ~
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43857 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43860 \begin_layout Description
43862 \begin_inset space ~
43866 \begin_inset space ~
43872 \begin_layout Description
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43878 \begin_inset space ~
43881 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43884 \begin_layout Description
43886 \begin_inset space ~
43890 \begin_inset space ~
43896 \begin_layout Description
43898 \begin_inset space ~
43902 \begin_inset space ~
43905 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43911 \begin_inset Index idx
43914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43921 , when using this, set the document language to
43926 \begin_layout Description
43928 \begin_inset space ~
43932 \begin_inset space ~
43935 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43940 , when using this, set the document language to
43943 \begin_inset space ~
43949 \begin_layout Description
43951 \begin_inset space ~
43955 \begin_inset space ~
43958 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43964 \begin_inset Index idx
43967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43969 -packages ! japanese
43974 , when using this, set the document language to
43979 \begin_layout Description
43981 \begin_inset space ~
43985 \begin_inset space ~
43988 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43993 , when using this, set the document language to
43998 \begin_layout Description
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44007 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44012 , when using this, set the document language to
44017 \begin_layout Description
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44022 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44025 \begin_layout Description
44027 \begin_inset space ~
44031 \begin_inset space ~
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44038 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44041 \begin_layout Description
44043 \begin_inset space ~
44047 \begin_inset space ~
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44054 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44055 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44056 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44059 \begin_layout Description
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44065 \begin_inset space ~
44071 \begin_layout Description
44073 \begin_inset space ~
44077 \begin_inset space ~
44080 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44081 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44084 \begin_layout Description
44086 \begin_inset space ~
44090 \begin_inset space ~
44093 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44099 \begin_inset Index idx
44102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44109 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44112 \begin_layout Description
44114 \begin_inset space ~
44122 \begin_inset space ~
44125 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44132 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44135 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44142 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44143 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44145 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44148 \begin_layout Description
44150 \begin_inset space ~
44154 \begin_inset space ~
44157 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44163 \begin_inset Index idx
44166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44173 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44176 \begin_layout Description
44178 \begin_inset space ~
44181 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44187 \begin_inset Index idx
44190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44192 -packages ! inputenc
44198 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44202 \begin_layout Description
44204 \begin_inset space ~
44208 \begin_inset space ~
44212 \begin_inset space ~
44215 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44216 \begin_inset space ~
44222 \begin_layout Description
44224 \begin_inset space ~
44228 \begin_inset space ~
44232 \begin_inset space ~
44235 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44236 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44237 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44241 \begin_layout Description
44243 \begin_inset space ~
44247 \begin_inset space ~
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44254 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44255 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44258 \begin_layout Section
44260 \begin_inset Index idx
44263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44270 \begin_inset Index idx
44273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44280 \begin_inset Index idx
44283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44284 Color ! Shaded boxes
44290 \begin_inset Index idx
44293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44294 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44302 \begin_layout Standard
44303 Here you can alter the font color for the
44307 (default: black), for
44310 \begin_inset space ~
44315 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44319 (default: white) and for
44322 \begin_inset space ~
44332 sets the color back to the default.
44335 \begin_layout Standard
44336 Clicking any button showing
44344 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44345 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44346 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44347 later more quickly.
44350 \begin_layout Standard
44351 Note, if you change the
44354 \begin_inset space ~
44359 font color and use the option
44362 \begin_inset space ~
44367 in the document settings under
44370 \begin_inset space ~
44375 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44376 \begin_inset space ~
44380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44382 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44389 \begin_layout Standard
44390 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44396 \begin_layout Standard
44400 \begin_inset space ~
44409 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44412 \begin_inset space ~
44415 Code after a forced page break:
44418 \begin_layout Itemize
44419 For the page color:
44420 \begin_inset Newline newline
44427 pagecolor{color name}
44430 \begin_layout Itemize
44431 For the text color:
44432 \begin_inset Newline newline
44442 \begin_layout Standard
44443 You are restricted to one of
44479 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44486 \begin_inset space ~
44492 \begin_inset Newline newline
44495 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44496 names to refer to them:
44499 \begin_layout Itemize
44505 \begin_inset Newline newline
44510 page_backgroundcolor
44513 \begin_layout Itemize
44517 \begin_inset space ~
44523 \begin_inset Newline newline
44531 \begin_layout Itemize
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44541 \begin_inset Newline newline
44549 \begin_layout Itemize
44553 \begin_inset space ~
44559 \begin_inset Newline newline
44567 \begin_layout Standard
44568 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44571 \begin_inset space ~
44579 \begin_inset space ~
44587 \begin_layout Section
44591 \begin_layout Standard
44592 Here you can adjust the
44596 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44600 as described in section
44601 \begin_inset space ~
44605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44607 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44614 \begin_layout Section
44618 \begin_layout Standard
44619 Here you can specify if a
44620 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887883
44623 citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44625 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887840
44631 \begin_inset Index idx
44634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44636 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887846
44638 -packages ! biblatex
44650 \begin_inset Index idx
44653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44665 \begin_inset Index idx
44668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44670 -packages ! jurabib
44677 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887869
44678 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44680 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887870
44685 Sectioned bibliography
44687 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44693 \begin_inset Index idx
44696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44698 -packages ! bibtopic
44704 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887945
44706 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44711 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887949
44713 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887950
44717 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887962
44724 for the generation of the bibliography.
44725 For a further description
44726 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887970
44730 \begin_inset space ~
44734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44736 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44743 \begin_layout Section
44747 \begin_layout Standard
44748 Here you can define the
44752 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44754 \begin_inset space ~
44758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44760 reference "sec:Index"
44767 \begin_layout Section
44771 \begin_layout Standard
44772 The PDF properties are explained in section
44773 \begin_inset space ~
44777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44779 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44786 \begin_layout Section
44790 \begin_layout Standard
44791 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44792 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44798 \begin_inset Index idx
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44803 -packages ! amsmath
44813 \begin_inset Index idx
44816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44818 -packages ! amssymb
44828 \begin_inset Index idx
44831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44843 \begin_inset Index idx
44846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44858 \begin_inset Index idx
44861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44863 -packages ! mathdots
44873 \begin_inset Index idx
44876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44878 -packages ! mathtools
44888 \begin_inset Index idx
44891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44903 \begin_inset Index idx
44906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44908 -packages ! stackrel
44918 \begin_inset Index idx
44921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44923 -packages ! stmaryrd
44933 \begin_inset Index idx
44936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44938 -packages ! undertilde
44943 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44946 \begin_layout Description
44947 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44948 -errors in formulas,
44949 ensure that you have this enabled.
44952 \begin_layout Description
44953 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44954 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44955 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44959 \begin_layout Description
44960 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44963 \begin_inset space ~
44975 \begin_layout Description
44976 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44991 \begin_layout Description
44992 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45003 \begin_layout Description
45004 mathtools is used for the math commands
45040 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45047 \begin_layout Description
45048 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45050 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45059 \begin_layout Description
45060 stackrel is used for the math command
45077 \begin_layout Description
45078 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45081 \begin_layout Description
45082 undertilde is used for the math command
45090 Accents for one Character
45099 \begin_layout Section
45103 \begin_layout Standard
45104 The float placement options are described in the section
45107 \begin_inset space ~
45115 \begin_inset space ~
45123 \begin_layout Section
45127 \begin_layout Standard
45128 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45130 Program Code Listings
45135 \begin_inset space ~
45143 \begin_layout Section
45147 \begin_layout Standard
45148 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45156 set to be used and set the
45161 The itemize environment is described in section
45162 \begin_inset space ~
45166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45168 reference "sec:Itemize"
45175 \begin_layout Standard
45176 You can furthermore specify a
45179 \begin_inset space ~
45184 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45185 command of the desired character.
45186 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45193 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45199 \begin_inset space \space{}
45203 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45213 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45214 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45217 \begin_layout Standard
45218 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45226 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45227 -packages in the preamble (menu
45230 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45231 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45234 \begin_inset space ~
45240 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45244 usepackage{textcomp}
45247 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45251 usepackage{amssymb}
45261 \begin_layout Section
45265 \begin_layout Standard
45266 Branches are described in section
45267 \begin_inset space ~
45271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45273 reference "sec:Branches"
45280 \begin_layout Section
45282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45284 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45291 \begin_layout Standard
45292 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45295 \begin_layout Description
45297 \begin_inset space ~
45301 \begin_inset space ~
45304 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45324 View Master Document
45325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45332 Update Master Document
45333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45340 menu or the toolbar.
45341 The default is set in
45343 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45344 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45346 \begin_inset space ~
45349 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45353 \begin_inset space ~
45357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45359 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45366 \begin_layout Description
45368 \begin_inset space ~
45372 \begin_inset space ~
45375 Output settings for the menu
45377 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45379 \begin_inset space ~
45385 For a detailed description see section
45387 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45392 \begin_inset space ~
45400 \begin_layout Description
45402 \begin_inset space ~
45406 \begin_inset space ~
45409 Options offers settings for the export format
45417 \begin_inset space ~
45422 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45423 \begin_inset space ~
45426 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45430 \begin_inset space ~
45435 settings are described in detail in section
45437 Math Output in XHTML
45442 \begin_inset space ~
45451 \begin_inset space ~
45455 \begin_inset space ~
45460 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45463 \begin_layout Description
45465 \begin_inset space ~
45470 Save transient properties
45472 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45473 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45474 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45478 \begin_layout Itemize
45479 the activation of change tracking
45482 \begin_layout Itemize
45483 the output of tracked changes
45486 \begin_layout Itemize
45487 the recording of the document directory path.
45490 \begin_layout Standard
45491 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45492 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45496 \begin_layout Section
45504 \begin_layout Standard
45505 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45507 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45509 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45511 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45515 \begin_layout Standard
45516 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45517 -syntax is given in section
45518 \begin_inset space ~
45522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45524 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45531 \begin_layout Chapter
45537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45539 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45544 \begin_inset Index idx
45547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45556 \begin_layout Standard
45557 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45559 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45563 It has the following submenus.
45566 \begin_layout Section
45570 \begin_layout Subsection
45574 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45575 User Interface File
45576 \begin_inset Index idx
45579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45580 Customization ! of toolbars
45586 \begin_inset Index idx
45589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45590 Customization ! of menus
45598 \begin_layout Standard
45599 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45600 interface (ui) file.
45601 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45609 \begin_layout Description
45614 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45617 \begin_layout Description
45624 the menu entries in popup context menus
45627 \begin_layout Description
45632 specifies the toolbar buttons
45635 \begin_layout Standard
45636 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45637 and edit the entries.
45640 \begin_layout Standard
45641 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45653 entries must be finished with an explicit
45678 and in the case of the
45679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45691 The syntax for the entries is:
45694 \begin_layout Standard
45695 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45724 \begin_layout Standard
45726 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45729 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45730 -functions are listed in the menu
45732 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45734 \begin_inset space ~
45742 \begin_layout Standard
45743 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45749 \begin_layout Standard
45750 For example, assuming you use the menu
45752 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45755 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45759 \begin_layout Standard
45760 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45784 \begin_layout Standard
45786 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45801 to have the sixth bookmark.
45804 \begin_layout Standard
45808 \begin_inset space ~
45813 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45814 's toolbar buttons.
45815 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45816 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45819 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45831 \begin_layout Standard
45834 Enable tool tips in main work area
45836 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45844 \begin_layout Standard
45849 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45850 should display in the menu
45852 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45854 \begin_inset space ~
45862 \begin_layout Subsection
45866 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45870 \begin_layout Standard
45873 Restore window layouts and geometries
45876 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45877 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45881 \begin_layout Standard
45884 Restore cursor positions
45886 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45890 \begin_layout Standard
45893 Load opened files from last session
45895 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45899 \begin_layout Standard
45902 Clear all session information
45904 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45905 sessions (cursor positions, names
45906 of last opened documents, etc.).
45909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45913 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45918 \begin_inset Index idx
45921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45930 \begin_layout Standard
45933 Backup original documents when saving
45935 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45936 it was saved the last time.
45937 It is stored in the
45940 \begin_inset space ~
45946 \begin_inset space ~
45950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45952 reference "sec:Paths"
45956 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45959 \begin_inset space ~
45965 The backup file has the file extension
45966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45980 \begin_layout Standard
45983 Backup documents, every
45985 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45988 \begin_layout Standard
45991 Save documents compressed by default
45993 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45994 \begin_inset space ~
45998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46000 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46005 This applies to newly created documents only.
46006 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46009 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46010 Windows & work area
46013 \begin_layout Standard
46016 Open documents in tabs
46018 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46022 \begin_layout Standard
46027 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46034 \begin_inset space ~
46038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46040 reference "sec:Paths"
46044 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46051 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46052 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46053 of \SpecialChar LyX
46055 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46056 instance is created for each file.
46059 \begin_layout Standard
46062 Single close-tab button
46064 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46074 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46075 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46076 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
46080 \begin_layout Standard
46081 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46089 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46090 before the change takes effect.
46098 \begin_layout Standard
46103 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46105 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46107 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46111 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46112 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46113 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46116 \begin_layout Subsection
46118 \begin_inset Index idx
46121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46130 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46137 \begin_layout Standard
46138 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46142 \begin_layout Standard
46143 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46151 This section only deals with the fonts
46155 the \SpecialChar LyX
46157 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46160 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46161 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46172 \begin_layout Standard
46173 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46190 (depends on the system) as its
46193 \begin_inset space ~
46209 \begin_layout Standard
46210 You can change the font size with the
46217 \begin_layout Standard
46222 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46227 points have the size of 1
46228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46232 \begin_inset space ~
46236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46238 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46243 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46248 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46249 \begin_inset space ~
46253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46255 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46262 \begin_layout Standard
46265 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46267 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46268 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46269 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46270 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46271 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46273 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46274 \begin_inset space ~
46280 \begin_layout Subsection
46282 \begin_inset Index idx
46285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46286 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46293 \begin_inset Index idx
46296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46305 \begin_layout Standard
46306 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46307 by choosing an item in the
46308 list and selecting the
46315 \begin_layout Standard
46316 By checking the option
46320 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46323 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46324 \begin_inset space ~
46328 \begin_inset space ~
46333 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46336 \begin_layout Subsection
46338 \begin_inset Index idx
46341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46350 \begin_layout Standard
46351 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46355 \begin_layout Standard
46360 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46361 This feature is described in section
46362 \begin_inset space ~
46366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46368 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46375 \begin_layout Standard
46376 Checking the option
46379 \begin_inset space ~
46383 \begin_inset space ~
46387 \begin_inset space ~
46392 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46395 \begin_layout Section
46397 \begin_inset Index idx
46400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46409 \begin_layout Subsection
46413 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46417 \begin_layout Standard
46420 Cursor follows scrollbar
46422 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46426 \begin_layout Standard
46427 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46428 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46429 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46432 \begin_layout Standard
46435 Scroll below end of document
46437 is self-explanatory.
46440 \begin_layout Standard
46441 In \SpecialChar LyX
46442 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46449 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46451 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46452 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46455 \begin_layout Standard
46458 Sort environments alphabetically
46460 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46463 \begin_layout Standard
46466 Group environments by their category
46468 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46471 \begin_layout Standard
46476 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46491 \begin_layout Standard
46492 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46497 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46498 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46502 \begin_layout Subsection
46504 \begin_inset Index idx
46507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46514 \begin_inset Index idx
46517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46518 Settings ! Shortcuts
46526 \begin_layout Standard
46531 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46533 Several binding files are available, among them:
46536 \begin_layout Description
46537 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46540 \begin_layout Description
46541 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46553 \begin_layout Description
46554 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46565 \begin_layout Standard
46566 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46571 , and binding files for special languages.
46572 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46577 \begin_inset space \space{}
46581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46589 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46590 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46591 will try to use the appropriate binding
46595 \begin_layout Standard
46596 Some binding files, like
46600 , only have a limited scope.
46601 When looking at the end of the file
46605 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46608 \begin_layout Standard
46612 \begin_inset space ~
46616 \begin_inset space ~
46621 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46622 in the selected key binding file.
46625 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46629 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46634 \begin_inset Index idx
46637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46638 Key Bindings ! Editing
46646 \begin_layout Standard
46647 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46648 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46649 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46650 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46653 Show key-bindings containing
46656 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46657 Insert there for example as keyword
46658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46665 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46666 functions that contain
46667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46675 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46676 All \SpecialChar LyX
46677 functions are also listed in the file
46682 that you will find in the
46689 \begin_layout Standard
46690 For example, to add the shortcut
46698 , select the function and press the
46703 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46704 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46707 \begin_layout Standard
46708 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46709 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46711 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46712 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46714 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46719 \begin_layout Standard
46720 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46723 \begin_layout Standard
46724 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46726 The syntax of the entries is:
46729 \begin_layout Standard
46735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46754 \begin_layout Subsection
46756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46758 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46763 \begin_inset Index idx
46766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46773 \begin_inset Index idx
46776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46777 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46785 \begin_layout Standard
46786 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46787 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46788 provides keyboard maps.
46789 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46790 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46793 \begin_inset space ~
46797 \begin_inset space ~
46802 and select the keyboard map file named
46809 \begin_layout Standard
46818 keyboard map and, if you use the
46822 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46825 arg "keymap-primary"
46831 arg "keymap-secondary"
46834 respectively or toggle between them with
46837 arg "keymap-toggle"
46843 \begin_layout Standard
46844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46852 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46861 \begin_layout Standard
46862 You can also specify the mouse
46864 Wheel scrolling speed
46867 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46871 Middle mouse button pasting
46873 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46874 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46877 \begin_layout Standard
46885 \begin_inset space ~
46889 \begin_inset space ~
46894 you can select a key for zooming.
46895 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46898 \begin_layout Subsection
46902 \begin_layout Standard
46903 Input completion is described in section
46904 \begin_inset space ~
46908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46910 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46917 \begin_layout Section
46919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46926 \begin_inset Index idx
46929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46936 \begin_inset Index idx
46939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46948 \begin_layout Standard
46949 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46950 are normally determined during
46952 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46955 \begin_layout Description
46957 \begin_inset space ~
46960 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46961 's working directory.
46962 It is the default when you
46973 \begin_inset space ~
46981 \begin_layout Description
46983 \begin_inset space ~
46986 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46988 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46990 \begin_inset space ~
46994 \begin_inset space ~
47002 \begin_layout Description
47004 \begin_inset space ~
47007 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47013 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47017 \begin_inset Newline newline
47021 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47033 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47034 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47042 \begin_layout Description
47044 \begin_inset space ~
47048 \begin_inset Index idx
47051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47057 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47058 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47059 \begin_inset space ~
47063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47065 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47073 will be used to save the backups.
47074 \begin_inset Newline newline
47077 Backup files have the ending
47078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47088 \begin_layout Description
47090 \begin_inset space ~
47093 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47094 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47096 \begin_inset Newline newline
47103 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47109 You can edit this file with the program
47118 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47119 in its preferences under
47122 \begin_inset space ~
47128 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47133 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47135 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47136 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47142 and \SpecialChar LyX
47143 need to be running the same time.
47144 \begin_inset Newline newline
47147 The pipe is also used for the
47151 feature, see section
47152 \begin_inset space ~
47156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47158 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47163 \begin_inset Newline newline
47166 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47167 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47168 \begin_inset Newline newline
47184 \begin_layout Description
47186 \begin_inset space ~
47189 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47192 \begin_layout Description
47194 \begin_inset space ~
47197 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47198 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47199 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47202 \begin_layout Description
47204 \begin_inset space ~
47207 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47213 You only need to specify it if you are using
47217 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47219 For \SpecialChar LyX
47224 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47228 \begin_layout Description
47230 \begin_inset space ~
47233 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47234 When \SpecialChar LyX
47235 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47236 to find it on the system.
47237 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47239 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47248 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47249 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47252 \begin_layout Description
47254 \begin_inset space ~
47257 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47258 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47259 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47260 code or in the document
47262 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47264 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47265 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47266 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47267 scanned for the input files.
47268 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47269 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47271 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47272 compilation may fail for some documents.
47275 \begin_layout Section
47279 \begin_layout Standard
47280 Here you can insert your
47289 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47291 \begin_inset space ~
47295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47297 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47301 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47304 \begin_layout Section
47306 \begin_inset Index idx
47309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47310 Language ! Settings
47316 \begin_inset Index idx
47319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47320 Settings ! Language
47328 \begin_layout Subsection
47330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47332 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47339 \begin_layout Description
47341 \begin_inset space ~
47345 \begin_inset space ~
47348 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47350 You can find its actual translation status here:
47351 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47353 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47361 \begin_layout Description
47363 \begin_inset space ~
47366 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47367 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47368 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47369 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47386 The most widespread language package is
47391 \begin_inset Index idx
47394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47401 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47403 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47404 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47405 come with the alternative
47411 \begin_inset Index idx
47414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47416 -packages ! polyglossia
47421 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47422 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47428 The available selections are described in section
47429 \begin_inset space ~
47433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47435 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47442 \begin_layout Description
47444 \begin_inset space ~
47447 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47448 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47449 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47450 An example is the start command
47456 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47458 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47462 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47478 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47483 \begin_layout Description
47485 \begin_inset space ~
47493 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47494 command toggles the package on and off.
47497 \begin_layout Description
47499 \begin_inset space ~
47503 \begin_inset space ~
47506 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47510 \begin_layout Description
47512 \begin_inset space ~
47516 \begin_inset space ~
47519 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47523 \begin_layout Description
47525 \begin_inset space ~
47529 \begin_inset space ~
47532 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47533 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47534 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47536 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47543 \begin_layout Description
47545 \begin_inset space ~
47548 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47550 When this option is not set, the
47553 \begin_inset space ~
47558 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47560 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47563 \begin_inset space ~
47571 \begin_layout Description
47573 \begin_inset space ~
47579 \begin_inset space ~
47585 When it is not set, the
47588 \begin_inset space ~
47593 is set to the end of the document.
47596 \begin_layout Description
47598 \begin_inset space ~
47602 \begin_inset space ~
47605 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47606 language will be underlined in blue.
47609 \begin_layout Description
47611 \begin_inset space ~
47615 \begin_inset space ~
47618 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47619 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47622 \begin_layout Description
47624 \begin_inset space ~
47627 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47628 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47629 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47630 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47633 \begin_layout Subsection
47637 \begin_layout Standard
47638 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47639 \begin_inset space ~
47643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47645 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47652 \begin_layout Section
47656 \begin_layout Subsection
47658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47660 name "subsec:General-output"
47667 \begin_layout Description
47669 \begin_inset space ~
47672 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47674 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47676 \begin_inset space ~
47682 For a detailed description see section
47684 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47689 \begin_inset space ~
47697 \begin_layout Description
47699 \begin_inset space ~
47702 Options Options for the program
47706 that is used for the export format
47711 \begin_inset space ~
47715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47717 reference "subsec:Export"
47722 Possible options are listed in the
47727 \begin_inset Newline newline
47731 \begin_inset Flex URL
47734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47736 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47746 \begin_layout Description
47748 \begin_inset space ~
47752 \begin_inset space ~
47755 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47758 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47759 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47761 \begin_inset space ~
47767 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47770 \begin_layout Description
47772 \begin_inset space ~
47776 \begin_inset Index idx
47779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47786 \begin_inset Index idx
47789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47790 Settings ! Date format
47795 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47796 \begin_inset Newline newline
47800 \begin_inset Flex URL
47803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47805 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47811 \begin_inset Newline newline
47814 For example the format
47815 \begin_inset Newline newline
47819 \begin_inset Newline newline
47822 prints the date as day/month/year.
47825 \begin_layout Description
47827 \begin_inset space ~
47831 \begin_inset space ~
47834 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47835 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47838 \begin_layout Subsection
47844 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47846 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47851 \begin_inset Index idx
47854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47855 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47864 \begin_layout Description
47866 \begin_inset space ~
47874 \begin_inset space ~
47878 \begin_inset space ~
47881 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47886 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47907 are used for Cyrillic.
47908 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47921 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47923 sets up in the background.
47924 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47927 \begin_layout Description
47929 \begin_inset space ~
47933 \begin_inset space ~
47937 \begin_inset space ~
47941 \begin_inset space ~
47944 options They only have an effect when the program
47948 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47951 \begin_layout Standard
47952 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47953 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47954 manuals of the applications.
47957 \begin_layout Description
47959 \begin_inset space ~
47962 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47963 \begin_inset space ~
47967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47969 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47976 \begin_layout Description
47978 \begin_inset space ~
47981 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47982 \begin_inset space ~
47986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47988 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47995 \begin_layout Description
47997 \begin_inset space ~
48000 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48001 \begin_inset space ~
48005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48007 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48014 \begin_layout Description
48020 \begin_inset space ~
48023 command Command for the program
48025 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48028 that is described in the section
48030 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48035 Additional Features
48040 \begin_layout Standard
48041 There are additionally the following options:
48044 \begin_layout Description
48046 \begin_inset space ~
48050 \begin_inset space ~
48054 \begin_inset space ~
48058 \begin_inset space ~
48063 \begin_inset space ~
48066 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48084 to separate folders.
48085 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48087 \begin_inset Index idx
48090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48097 \begin_inset Index idx
48100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48109 \begin_layout Description
48111 \begin_inset space ~
48115 \begin_inset space ~
48119 \begin_inset space ~
48123 \begin_inset space ~
48127 \begin_inset space ~
48131 \begin_inset space ~
48134 changes Removes all manually set
48140 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48141 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48143 \begin_inset space ~
48148 dialog when changing the document class.
48151 \begin_layout Section
48153 \begin_inset space ~
48157 \begin_inset Index idx
48160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48169 \begin_layout Subsection
48171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48173 name "subsec:Converters"
48178 \begin_inset Index idx
48181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48190 \begin_layout Standard
48191 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48192 from one format to another.
48193 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48194 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48201 \begin_inset space ~
48206 field and press the
48211 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48215 \begin_inset space ~
48220 drop-down list, modify the
48224 field and press the
48231 \begin_layout Standard
48234 Converter File Cache
48240 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48242 Maximum Age (in days
48245 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48246 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48249 \begin_layout Standard
48250 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48251 definition, is described in the section
48262 \begin_layout Subsection
48264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48266 name "sec:File-Formats"
48271 \begin_inset Index idx
48274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48281 \begin_inset Index idx
48284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48293 \begin_layout Standard
48294 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48304 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48307 \begin_layout Standard
48308 You can also define the
48310 Default output format
48312 that is used when you use
48314 View, Update, View Master Document
48318 Update Master Document
48324 menu or the toolbar.
48327 \begin_layout Standard
48328 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48339 \begin_layout Standard
48340 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48342 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48343 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48344 This is done by specifying a
48349 More about this is described in the section
48360 \begin_layout Chapter
48361 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48363 \begin_inset Index idx
48366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48375 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48382 \begin_layout Standard
48384 \begin_inset space ~
48388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48390 reference "tab:Units"
48394 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48395 and used in this documentation.
48398 \begin_layout Standard
48399 \begin_inset Float table
48405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48406 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48424 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48432 \begin_inset Tabular
48433 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48434 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48435 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48436 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48437 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48570 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48643 scaled point (65536
48644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48722 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48795 % of original image width
48800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49111 \begin_layout Chapter
49113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49115 name "chap:Credits"
49122 \begin_layout Standard
49123 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49124 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49127 \begin_layout Itemize
49130 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49133 \begin_layout Itemize
49139 \begin_layout Itemize
49145 \begin_layout Itemize
49151 \begin_layout Itemize
49157 \begin_layout Itemize
49163 \begin_layout Itemize
49169 \begin_layout Itemize
49175 \begin_layout Itemize
49178 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49181 \begin_layout Itemize
49187 \begin_layout Itemize
49193 \begin_layout Itemize
49199 \begin_layout Itemize
49205 \begin_layout Itemize
49211 \begin_layout Itemize
49217 \begin_layout Itemize
49223 \begin_layout Itemize
49229 \begin_layout Itemize
49230 The \SpecialChar LyX
49232 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49242 \begin_layout Standard
49243 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49246 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49253 \begin_layout Bibliography
49254 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49255 LatexCommand bibitem
49262 The \SpecialChar LyX
49264 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49267 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49273 \begin_inset Newline newline
49277 \begin_inset Flex URL
49280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49282 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49290 \begin_layout Bibliography
49291 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49292 LatexCommand bibitem
49293 key "latexcompanion"
49298 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49300 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49301 Companion Second Edition.
49304 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49307 \begin_layout Bibliography
49308 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49309 LatexCommand bibitem
49315 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49318 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49322 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49325 \begin_layout Bibliography
49326 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49327 LatexCommand bibitem
49336 : A Document Preparation System.
49339 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49342 \begin_layout Bibliography
49343 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49344 LatexCommand bibitem
49354 The \SpecialChar TeX
49358 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49361 \begin_layout Bibliography
49362 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49363 LatexCommand bibitem
49369 The \SpecialChar TeX
49371 \begin_inset Newline newline
49375 \begin_inset Flex URL
49378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49380 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49388 \begin_layout Bibliography
49389 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49390 LatexCommand bibitem
49396 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49398 \begin_inset Newline newline
49402 \begin_inset Flex URL
49405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49407 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49415 \begin_layout Bibliography
49416 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49417 LatexCommand bibitem
49424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49426 name "Documentation"
49427 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49434 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49438 \begin_inset Newline newline
49442 \begin_inset Flex URL
49445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49447 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49455 \begin_layout Bibliography
49456 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49457 LatexCommand bibitem
49464 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49466 name "Documentation"
49467 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49472 how to use the program
49474 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49478 \begin_inset Newline newline
49482 \begin_inset Flex URL
49485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49487 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49495 \begin_layout Bibliography
49496 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49497 LatexCommand bibitem
49504 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49507 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49512 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49518 \begin_inset Index idx
49521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49523 -packages ! biblatex
49529 \begin_inset Newline newline
49533 \begin_inset Flex URL
49536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49538 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49546 \begin_layout Bibliography
49547 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49548 LatexCommand bibitem
49555 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49557 name "Documentation"
49558 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49568 \begin_inset Newline newline
49572 \begin_inset Flex URL
49575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49577 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49585 \begin_layout Bibliography
49586 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49587 LatexCommand bibitem
49588 key "makeindex-man"
49594 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49597 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49607 \begin_inset Newline newline
49611 \begin_inset Flex URL
49614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49616 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49624 \begin_layout Bibliography
49625 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49626 LatexCommand bibitem
49633 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49635 name "Documentation"
49636 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49646 \begin_inset Newline newline
49650 \begin_inset Flex URL
49653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49655 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49663 \begin_layout Bibliography
49664 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49665 LatexCommand bibitem
49672 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49674 name "Documentation"
49675 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49680 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49682 \begin_inset Newline newline
49686 \begin_inset Flex URL
49689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49691 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49699 \begin_layout Bibliography
49700 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49701 LatexCommand bibitem
49708 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49710 name "Documentation"
49711 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49716 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49722 \begin_inset Index idx
49725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49727 -packages ! caption
49733 \begin_inset Newline newline
49737 \begin_inset Flex URL
49740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49742 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49750 \begin_layout Bibliography
49751 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49752 LatexCommand bibitem
49759 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49761 name "Documentation"
49762 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49767 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49773 \begin_inset Index idx
49776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49778 -packages ! enumitem
49784 \begin_inset Newline newline
49788 \begin_inset Flex URL
49791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49793 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49801 \begin_layout Bibliography
49802 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49803 LatexCommand bibitem
49810 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49812 name "Documentation"
49813 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49818 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49824 \begin_inset Index idx
49827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49829 -packages ! fancyhdr
49835 \begin_inset Newline newline
49839 \begin_inset Flex URL
49842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49844 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49852 \begin_layout Bibliography
49853 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49854 LatexCommand bibitem
49861 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49863 name "Documentation"
49864 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49869 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49875 \begin_inset Index idx
49878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49880 -packages ! hyperref
49886 \begin_inset Newline newline
49890 \begin_inset Flex URL
49893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49895 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49903 \begin_layout Bibliography
49904 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49905 LatexCommand bibitem
49912 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49914 name "Documentation"
49915 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49920 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49926 \begin_inset Index idx
49929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49931 -packages ! nomencl
49937 \begin_inset Newline newline
49941 \begin_inset Flex URL
49944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49946 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49954 \begin_layout Bibliography
49955 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49956 LatexCommand bibitem
49963 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49965 name "Documentation"
49966 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49971 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49977 \begin_inset Index idx
49980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49982 -packages ! prettyref
49988 \begin_inset Newline newline
49992 \begin_inset Flex URL
49995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49997 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50005 \begin_layout Bibliography
50006 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50007 LatexCommand bibitem
50014 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50016 name "Documentation"
50017 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50022 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50028 \begin_inset Index idx
50031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50033 -packages ! refstyle
50039 \begin_inset Newline newline
50043 \begin_inset Flex URL
50046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50048 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50056 \begin_layout Bibliography
50057 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50058 LatexCommand bibitem
50065 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50068 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50073 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50075 \begin_inset Newline newline
50079 \begin_inset Flex URL
50082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50084 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50092 \begin_layout Bibliography
50093 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50094 LatexCommand bibitem
50101 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50104 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50109 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50111 \begin_inset Newline newline
50115 \begin_inset Flex URL
50118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50120 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50128 \begin_layout Bibliography
50129 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50130 LatexCommand bibitem
50137 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50140 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50145 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50146 for Cyrillic languages:
50147 \begin_inset Newline newline
50151 \begin_inset Flex URL
50154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50156 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50164 \begin_layout Bibliography
50165 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50166 LatexCommand bibitem
50173 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50176 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50181 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50183 \begin_inset Newline newline
50187 \begin_inset Flex URL
50190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50192 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50200 \begin_layout Bibliography
50201 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50202 LatexCommand bibitem
50209 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50212 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50217 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50219 \begin_inset Newline newline
50223 \begin_inset Flex URL
50226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50228 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50236 \begin_layout Bibliography
50237 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50238 LatexCommand bibitem
50245 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50248 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50253 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50255 \begin_inset Newline newline
50259 \begin_inset Flex URL
50262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50264 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50272 \begin_layout Bibliography
50273 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50274 LatexCommand bibitem
50281 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50284 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50289 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50291 \begin_inset Newline newline
50295 \begin_inset Flex URL
50298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50300 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50308 \begin_layout Bibliography
50309 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50310 LatexCommand bibitem
50317 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50320 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50325 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50327 \begin_inset Newline newline
50331 \begin_inset Flex URL
50334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50336 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50344 \begin_layout Bibliography
50345 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50346 LatexCommand bibitem
50353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50356 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50361 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50363 \begin_inset Newline newline
50367 \begin_inset Flex URL
50370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50372 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50380 \begin_layout Bibliography
50381 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50382 LatexCommand bibitem
50389 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50392 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50397 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50399 \begin_inset Newline newline
50403 \begin_inset Flex URL
50406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50408 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50416 \begin_layout Bibliography
50417 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50418 LatexCommand bibitem
50425 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50428 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50433 about new features in
50439 \begin_inset Newline newline
50443 \begin_inset Flex URL
50446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50448 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50456 \begin_layout Standard
50457 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50491 \begin_inset Note Note
50494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50501 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50502 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50503 bibliography is the second one:
50511 \begin_layout Standard
50512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50513 LatexCommand bibtex
50514 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50515 options "biblio/alphadin"
50522 \begin_layout Standard
50523 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50527 \begin_layout Standard
50528 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50529 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50535 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50536 LatexCommand printindex